giao an 10 chuan

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (781.06 KB, 174 trang )

(1)<div class='page_container' data-page=1>

Ngày soạn: 20/8/2010

Period 1: Introduce the subject
I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp hc sinh biết về chơng trình học của cuốn sách TiÕng Anh 10

Giúp h/s biết đợc cách học tốt nhất cho cgwowng trình Tiếng Anh 10 và các loại bài
kiểm tra

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sách giáo khoa, giáo án

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10 H
10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 không

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities 
I.Warm up :

đa ra các câu hỏi

- How are you today ?

- How many Ss are there in your class ?
- What did you do in your summer holiday?
- Did you revise your English lesson ?
Gäi h/s giíi thiƯu vỊ b¶n thân

- Nghe và trả lời

- giới thiệu về bản thân

II.Presentation :

1. content of text book :

- Giíi thiƯu vỊ néi dung cđa s¸ch TiÕng Anh
10:

- How many units are there in the text book ?
- 16 units - 105 periods

+ 80 periods ( learn)

+ 25 Periods ( revision and check )
- 6 topics :

You and me; education; community; Nature
and environment; recreation; people and
places.

- How many skills / parts are there in the unit?

Nghiên cứu sách và trả lời các
câu hỏi

P1: there're 5 parts in the unit
- reading skill

- Speaking skill
- Listening skill
- writing skill
- Language focus
P2:

P3:

2. How to learn : 
Reading skill :

- What do we read the reading passage for ?
- To read the passages fastest What must we
prepare ?

Reading to develop reading skill .

- Reading to understand vocabulary and
grammar .

- To read the passage fastest , we prepare

Nghiên cứu từng bài học vàtrả

lời các câu hỏi

</div>
(2)<div class='page_container' data-page=2>

well:

-At home + vocabulary
+ read the passage
- In class : + work in pairs
+ work in groups
+ Work individually

Speaking skill:

- How many tasks are there in the speaking
lesson?

- What task is the most difficult ? why ?
Check and give answers :

- There are often 3 tasks in the speaking
lesson .

- Task 3 is the most difficult because :
+ Task 1,2 : Control speaking
+ Task 3 : free speaking

- So we must prepare for speaking well . What
must we prepare ?

3. what to check :

- Ask Ps to open your book Page 41 and answer
Qs

- How many skills do they check in the test ?
( 4 skills)

- T. says about all tests : 15', written test, oral
test.

4. Củng cố

Nhắc lại các phần chính trong bài 
 5. Dặn dò

Chuẩn bị bài mới : Unit 1 - reading

</div>
(3)<div class='page_container' data-page=3>

Ngày soạn: 20/8/2010

Unit 1: A day in the life of...
 Period 2: Reading

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giỳp học sinh đọc và nắn đợc các từ , cụm từ lien quan đến công việc háng ngày của
một ngời , nắm đợc nội dung của bài đọc để làm các bài tập trong bài

Phát triển các kỹ năng đọc hiểu
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo án băng . đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG

1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10 H

10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 không

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

I- Before you read :

Cung cÊp tõ míi cho h/s.
a- Peasant /peznt/ ( N ) = farmer
b- lead buffalo to the field (V)
c- plot of land ( N) m¶nh ruéng
d- Pump water ( V)

e- Transplant (V)/do the transplanting/
grow rice

f- Plough (V) = turn up the soil
j- Harrow (V) = break the soil

* After matching teacher reads new
words

Đọc từ mới

</div>
(4)<div class='page_container' data-page=4>

Ngày soạn: 20/8/2010

Unit 1: A day in the life of...
 Period 2: Reading

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Phát triển các kỹ năng đọc hiểu
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo án băng . đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10 H

10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 không

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

* Answer Qs
P1 :

P2:
P3:
P4:
P5:

She/ he works on the farm / in the field
I- Before you read :

Cung cÊp tõ míi cho h/s.
a- Peasant /peznt/ ( N ) = farmer
b- lead buffalo to the field (V)
c- plot of land ( N) m¶nh ruéng
d- Pump water ( V)

e- Transplant (V)/do the transplanting/
grow rice

f- Plough (V) = turn up the soil
j- Harrow (V) = break the soil

* After matching teacher reads new
words

§äc tõ míi

- Look at the pictures and match :

- Listen and repeat.
- Read aloud

II. While you read : 
1. Task 1

Bật băng cho h/s nghe và đọc bài
Yêu cầu h/s đọc các từ và câu và chọn
đáp án

Gọi h/s nêu đáp án :
Keys : ( 1.C ; 2.C ; 3.A; 4A
GiảI thích lại nghĩa các cụm từ

Work in pairs

* Ps to read silently after the tape .
* Read and do task 1

*Ps discuss in pairs and read up before
the class.

</div>
(5)<div class='page_container' data-page=5></div>
(6)<div class='page_container' data-page=6>

Task 3

* Asks Ps to read scanning the passage and make
brief note about Mr. Vy and Mrs. Tuyet's daily
routines .

* Checks and gives suggested answers :
 * In the morning

*4:30 : A alarm go off , Mr.Vy gets up , goes
down the kitchen , boils water for tea,

Drinks tea, has a quick breakfast, leads the buffalo to
the field.

* 5:15: leave the house.
*7:45 : take a rest.
* 10:30 : goes home

* 11:30 : has lunch with family .
*In the afternoon:

*2:30 p.m: Mr Vy and Mrs.Tuyet go to the
field again, repair the banks of their plot of land .
He pumps water into it . She does the

transplanting.

* 6 :00 p.m : finish work
*7:00 p.m : have dinner .

* Ps do in groups ( Group 1- in
the morning ; Gr 2- in the
afternoon ;Gr3- after dinner .)

* Ps fill in the blanks of the
chart in the task 3

* Ps compare their notes with
classmates

*Group 1 present the activities
that happens in the morning
before the class

* Group 2 present the activities
that happens in the afternoon
before the class

*Group 3 present the activities
that happens after dinner
before the class.

</div>
(7)<div class='page_container' data-page=7>

* After dinner :

*Watch T.V , go to bed

*Sometimes visit neighbors , chat with them * Ps go to the board and retellthe passage .
Work in pairs

* some pairs ask and answer
before the class.

3. After you read : ( 7 mins)

*Ask Ps to work in groups and talk about Mr. Vy and
Mrs. Tuyet 's daily routines.

* Call on some Ps to give a short talk about the daily
routines of these two farmers.

* Correct Ps' pronunciation mistakes

- Ps make a brief notes in
groups

- Ps share with others .
- Ps present in front of the
class

4. Consolidation : ( 4 mins )

* Ps talk about their fathers or mothers ' daily routines in groups.
5. Homework ( 2 mins)

* Write a passage about 50 words about your fathers or mothers' daily routines .

</div>
(8)<div class='page_container' data-page=8>

Ngày soạn: 20/8/2010

Unit 1 A day in the life of ...
 Period 3 : Speaking

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giỳp học sinh biết hỏi và trả lời những thông tin về hoạt động hàng ngày , nói về cơng
việc thờng ngày của mình và của ngời khác

Ph¸t triĨn c¸c kỹ năng nói
II. THIT B GING DY 
Sỏch giỏo khoa, giáo án

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10 H
10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 không

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities
1.Task 1 ( 10') :

Trình bày tình huống

 Quan is a tenth-grade student. He
goes to school every morning. Now
look at his weekly timetable on page
15 to practise with your classmates.
Yêu cầu h/s quan sát thêi khãa biĨu

đọc mẫu 2 ví dụ , hớng dẫn h/s thực hiện hội
thoại

A: What time does Quan often have civic 
education lesson on Monday ?

B: He often has Civic Education lesson at 
7:15 a.m.

A: What lesson does Quan often have at 7:15 
a.m on Monday ?

B: At 7:15 a.m on Monday he often has Civic 
Education lesson.( bµi GDCD)

Gọi h/s luyện tập đọc đoạn hội thoại

quan sát thời khóa biểu
Nghe c vớ d

Thực hành hỏi trả lời

Trình bày kết quả trớc lớp
 2. Task 2 ( 15') :

Hớng dẫn h/s nối các câu trả lời để tạo thành 1
đoạn văn nói về cỏc hot ng ca Quõn

Gọi h/s trình bày

Every day Quan gets up at 14:00 . Then he
studies for about 2 hours. He watches T.V at 
16:30. At 17:00 He rides to the stadium to 
play football with his friends. He gets back 
home at 18:30. After taking a shower, he has 
dinner with his family at 19:00. He prepares 
for the following day's lesson and goes to bed 
at 20:00 pm.

3. Task 3

Yêu cầu h/s nói về ngày làm việc điển hình cuẩ
mình dựa vào task 2

ni cỏc câu trả lời để tạo thành 1
đoạn văn nói v cỏc hot ng ca
Quõn

trình bày trớc lớp

Liệt kê các hoạt động tiêu biểu
của mình hàng ngày

</div>
(9)<div class='page_container' data-page=9>

Dïng c¸c mèc giê nãi vỊ ngày
làm việc điển hình cuẩ mình dựa
vào task 2

4. Củng cố .

Nhắc lại cách nói về công việc thờng ngày
5. Dặn dò

Học bài và chuẩn bị bài mới : lisening

</div>
(10)<div class='page_container' data-page=10>

Ngày soạn: 27/8/2010

Unit 1 : A day in the life of ...
Period 4 : Listening

I. mục đích – yêu cầu:

Nghe v hiểu đà ợc các hoạt động trong ngày của ngời láI xe xích lơ

Nghe và đánh số thứ tự các bức tranh, lựa chọn thông tin đúng sai,hỏi và trả lời các câu
hỏi

Tóm tắt nội dung chính của bài nghe
II.đồ dùng giảng dạy :

aSachs giáo khoa, đài cassette.
III. tiến trình:

1.Tỉ chøc

Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees

10H
10I

2. KiĨm tra bµi cị :

* Talking about your daily routine ?
* Checking Ps' homework

3. Bµi míi

Teacher's activities Ps' activities 
1.Warm-up :

* Đa câu hỏi và yêu cầu học sinh tr¶ lêi:

He has a cyclo .
-He always works in the streets.

- He usually meets a lot of people and takes them to
everywhere.

- Can you guess who is he ?
Dẫn dắt vào bài:

Today we're going to listen the tape about daily
routines of a cyclo driver.

2. Before you listen :

* Yêu cầu học sinh trả lêi c©u hái .
Have you ever traveled by cyclo?

When was it ?

Is it interesting to travel by cyclo ? Give reasons ? 
* Cung cÊp tõ míi .

-District (n): smaller than a province.

-Drop(v): take sbd to a place ( Chở ai đến 1 nơi)
-Passengers (n) : People who travel on a train , bus , 
plane .-Pedal (n, v) : Bàn đạp , đạp bằng bàn đạp

-Purchases (n)= furniture : Thing a person buys (đồ đạc
mua )

-Food stall (n) : a kiosk where food is sold . ( Quầy bán thực
phẩm )

3. While you listen :

* Task 1 - Pictures ordering

Bật băng cho hs nghe và yêu cầu học sinh nghe và sắp xếp
thứ tự của các bức tranh theo trật tự trong bài nghe và gọi hs
nêu đáp ỏn.

Chữa bài cùng cả lớp.

a.3 b.5 c.4 d.6 e.1 f.2

* Task 2 -True or false :

- Yêu cầu hs đọc các câu trong bài.

Trả lời các câu hỏi và đoán
xem ngời đó là ai

- Nêu đáp án.

ChÐp tõ míi

§äc theo giáo viên

Nghe và sắp xếp thứ tự của
các bức tranh theo trËt tù
trong bµi nghe

Thảo luận theo bàn , chọn
đáp án.

</div>
(11)<div class='page_container' data-page=11>

- Bật băng cho hs nghe và làm bài tập
Gọi hs nêu đáp án và giải thích.

- Chữa bài cùng cả lớp.
 -1. F ( not given ) 
 -2 .T

-3 .F ( He takes his passengers from district 5 to district 1 
 -4. F ( His first passenger is an old man.)

-5 . F ( He has lunch at a food stall near BenThanh market
-6. F ( he takes a short rest )

đọc các câu trong bài.
nghe và làm bài tập
nêu đáp án và giải thích.

4. After you listen

* Yêu cầu hs trả lời các câu hỏi về ông Lâm
A.What is the man's name ?

B. He is Mr.Lam
A.What does his do ?
B. He is a cyclo driver

A. What time does he start work ?
B. He starts work at 6 a.m

A. Who is his first passengers ? an old man or a lady ?
B. His first passenger is an old man

A. Where does he have lunch ?

B. He has lunch at a food stall near Ben Thanh market
A. Where does he take a short rest ?

B. He takes a short rest in his cyclo under a tree.

Hoạt động theo nhóm trả

lời các câu hỏi để nói về
cơng việc hàng ngày của
ông Lâm

4. Cñng cè

- nhắc lại nội dung chính trong bai
- cho h/s nghe lại 1 lợt

5. Dặn dò

- học từ mới và chuẩn bị bài : writing.

Ngày soạn: 28/8/2010

UNIT 1 : A DAY IN THE LIFE OF ...
 Period 5 : Writing

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giỳp học sinh hiểu đợc nội dung và ngôn ngữ , cấu trúc của bài văn trần thuật.

Viết đợc một bài văn trần thuật kể vè một vụ cháy khách sạn sử dụng nhng gi ý ó
cho.

Phát triển các kĩ năng viết.
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sách giáo khoa, giáo án

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG

1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10 H
10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 không

3. Bài mới

</div>
(12)<div class='page_container' data-page=12>

Teacher's activities Ps' activities
1. Warm-up :

* Cho hs tr¶ lời các câu hỏi.

- Have you ever heard a frightening story ?

- Where and when did it happen ?

- How did you feel about that ?

- The sentences above , which tense do we use ?
* To express the events that was ended in the past ,
we use the simple past tense. We're going to read the
passage used verbs in the past.

*Tr¶ lời các câu hỏi.
-Yes, I have

- It happened when I
was young at my
house /in my school .
- It made me frightened .
- We use in the simple
past tense

2.Task 1

* Yêu cầu hs đọc bài
Giải thích một số từ mới.

-Be due to (a) : Because of ...; owing to ( bëi v× )

-Stare death in the face(v) : so scared (Đối mặt với tử thần; 
Sợ xanh mặt)

-Take off (v) Plane leave the ground .

-Air- hostess (n) : Person who takes care of passengers on 
the plane .

-Fasten seatbelt (v) : Fix the seatbelt around the body to 
keep safe on the plane/ car…

-Be in danger (v) : to be in dangerous situation.
 * Yêu cầu hs tìm ra các hành động trong bài mẫu. 
Gọi hs nêu đáp án.

*Verbs : started, was, arrived, got, took off, 
began, thought, were, told, seemed, realized, were, 
screamed, thought, felt, announced, was, landed.

*Connectors: On that day, at first, then, just, a 
few, minutes later, one hour later.

* Häc tõ míi.

* Đọc bài mẫu và tìm
ra các hành động trong
bài.

- Nêu đáp án.

3. Task 2

Yêu cầu hs xác định các sự kiệnđỉnh điểm của sự
nguy hiểm và kết thúc có hậu .

Gọi hs nêu đáp án

*The events : Got on plane, plane took off, hostesses
were just beginning to serve lunch when plane began to
shake, plane seemed to dip, people screamed in panic.
* The climax: We thought we had only minutes to
live.

* The conclusion : Pilot announced that everything
was all right, we landed safely.

* Xác định các sự
kiệnđỉnh điểm của sự
nguy hiểm và kết thúc
có hậu .

* Nêu đáp án

4. Task 3

- Yêu cầu hs sử dụng các gọi ý để viết bài trần thuật về
một vụ cháy ở khách sạn..

- Giúp hs nếu gặp vớng mắc về từ vựng và ngữ pháp.
- Gọi i din vit bi lờn bng.

- Chữa lỗi.

Last year, I spent my summer holiday at a seaside town
. the hotel was modern and comfortable I had a wonderful 
holiday until the fire.

It was Saturday evening and everybody was sitting in the
discotheque( which was) on the ground floor. It was

crowded with people. They were dancing and singing

happily. Suddenly we smelt smoke. Then black smoke began

to fill the room. Everybody started to scream in panic.

* Hoạt động theo bàn
sử dụng các gọi ý để viết
bài trần thuật về một vụ
cháy ở khách sạn..
Đại diện viết bài lên
bảng.

</div>
(13)<div class='page_container' data-page=13>

People ran toward the fire exits. One door was blocked. 
Many people began to coughing and choking (nghÑt thë).
 Then, just as we thought we had only minutes to live, the 
fire brigade arrived. Firemen fought their way in to the 
room and soon everyone was safely out of the building. 
Luckily nobody was seriously hurt. It was the most 
frightening experience of my life.

Chữa bài .

4. Cñng cè :

* Nhắc lại cách viết một bài văn tờng thuật về ngữ pháp :
5Dặn dò.

* Học lại bài và chuẩn bị bài mói : language focuf

Ngày soạn: 28/8/2010 UNIT 1 - A DAY IN THE LIFE OF ...
 Period 6 - Language focus

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giỳp học sinh phân biệt đợc hai âm /i/ và /i:/

Ơn lại thì hiện tại đơn trạng ngữ chỉ tần số , quá khứ đơn
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn , băn g đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10 H
10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 không

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Pronunciation: The sounds /i/ - /i:/ 
Activity 1:

* Bật băng cho hs nghe và nhắc lại các từ , chú về
trơng độ giữ hai nguyên âm.

* Gọi hs đọc và sửa lỗi nếu cần thiết.

Nghe băng và nhắc lại các từ
Đọc các từ đơn lẻ và câu

3. Grammar and vocabulary ( 25') 
Simple present revision

* Yêu cầu hs nêu về cách sử dụng và cấu trúc thì
hiện tại đơn.

* Exercise 1:

* Yêu cầu hs làm bài tập.
* Gọi hs viết đáp án lên bảng.
* Chữa bài cùng cả lớp.

1. is 2. fish 3. worry 4. are 5. catch
6. am 7. catch 8. go 9. give up
10. say 11. realize 12. am

Revision of adverbs of frequency

nêu về cách sử dụng và cấu
trúc thì hiện tại đơn.

lµm bµi tËp.

viết đáp án lên bảng

</div>
(14)<div class='page_container' data-page=14>

* Yêu cầu hs nói về cách sử dụng của các trạng từ
chỉ mức độ thng xuyờn.

100% ---0%
Always-
usually-normally-often-sometimes-never

Yêu cầu học sinh làm bài tËp.

Positions : -in front of ORDINARY VERBS
- after the verb TO BE

- At the beginning of the sentence
Examples : We never go to bed late.

I am always free on Sundays.
Sometimes I go to bed late.
* Exercise 2.

- He usually gets up early
- He is never late for school

- Lan sometimes practices speaking English.
- Minh is always a hard- working pupil

hs nói về cách sử dụng của
các trạng từ chỉ mức độ thờng

xuyên.

*Exercise 3:

Yêu cầu hs nhắc lại cấu trúc của thì quá khứ đơnvà
làm bài tập .

Gọi hs viết đáp án lên bảng.
Chữa bài cùng cả lớp.

1. was done 2. cooked 3.were 4. smelt 5.
told 6. sang 7. began 8. felt 9. 
crept 10. put out 11. slept 12.woke
13. was 14. leapt. 15. hurried 16. found
17.wound 18.flowed

nhắc lại cấu trúc của thì quá
khứ đơn và làm bài tập .
viết đáp án lên bảng.

4. Cñng cè :

- Nhắc lại về cách sử dụng của thì hiện tại đơnvà quá khứ đơn.
5. Dặn dũ :

- HS học bài và chuẩn bị bài mới. Reading

</div>
(15)<div class='page_container' data-page=15>

Fri, Sep 3rd, 2010

UNIT 2 : SCHOOL TALKS
 Period 7 : Reading

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Gi úp học sinh đọc về đo ạn văn về trư ờng học và các vấn đè liên quan
Học sinh cố thể l àm các phần yêu cầu và phát triển về kĩ năng đọc hiểu
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sách giáo khoa, giáo án

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10 H
10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 không

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm- up (5' ):
đ ưa ra c âu h ỏi

+ Where are you usually after a lesson ?
+ Which topics do you often talk about ?

Today we will study a new lesson , 
School talks.

Tr¶ lêi c©u hái

* I think the most popular topic students
often talk about is their school/ studying,
sometimes sports or picnic .

2.Before you read: (7')
 * Đa câu hỏi

Which of the following topics do you 
often talk about ?

* Suggest some topics .

- Sports and games - holidays
 - entertainment - film
 - health problems - weather
 - hobbies - work and 
study

3.While you read:

* Giíi thiƯu bµi: You are going to read
three talks given by a student, a teacher and
a student's father about school. You read

them and do the tasks below.

* Note: New structures will appear in each
passage

- Like , enjoy , love + V-ing .

- Want, hope , decide + to infinitive .
Task 1 :

Bật đài cho h/s nghe và yêu cầu tìm từ
mới

GiảI thích một số từ:
- stuck(v) Tắc nghẽn

- household task(n) công việc trong nhà
 - attitude(n) quan điểm, thỏi

Thảo luận và đa ra ý kiến

Nghe và t×m tõ míi

chép bài
đọc từ mới

</div>
(16)<div class='page_container' data-page=16>

- mall (n) phố buôn bán

- shopper (n) ngi i mua hàng/ đi chợ
Cho h/s đọc lại bài và tìm từ điền vào chỗ

trống

Task 2 :

- Cho h/s đọc lại bài và tìm tên
ngờithực hiện các cơng việc
- Gọi hai h/s lên bảng

- Cho h/s nhËn xÐt và chữa bài

1. enjoy 2. traffic 3. worry
4. crowded 5. language

đọc lại bài và tỡm tờn ngithc hin cỏc
cụng vic

lên bảng viết câu trả lời
nhận xét và chữa bài

+ Mss Phuong : enjoys teaching; loves 
working with children; teaches E. at a ...
+ Phong : has get up early; lives far from 
school; loves learning E; rides a bike 
to ...; studies at a high school;

+ Mr. Hong Ha : worries about someone 
else's safety

*Task 3 :

- cho hs đọc câu hỏi và trả lời qua 3 bi 
c

- gọi h/s lên bảng viêt câu trả lời
Gọi h/s nhận xét và chữa bài

c cõu hi v trả lời qua 3 bài đọc
lên bảng viêt câu trả lời

1.He studies at Chu Van An High School 
2. He studies many subjects such as Math, 
Physics, Chemistry...

3 .Because it is an international language.
4. She says that teaching is hard work, but 
she enjoys it because she loves working 
with children.

5. Because his son has to ride his by in 
narrow and crowded streets on the way to 
school.

nhận xét và chữa bài
3. After you read

Cho h/s thảo luận và nói
Kiểm tra và chữ lỗi

I like learning English best because it is
very interesting to learn. In class we can 
exchange ideas and discuss various topics 
in English, I learn English at the same 
time .

4: Cñng cè

đọc lại từ mới 
 5: Dn dũ

Học từ mới và chuẩn bị bài : speaking

Ngày so¹n 5 /9/2010 UNIT 2: SCHOOL TALKS
 Period 8 - Lesson 2: Speaking 
I.MỤC ĐÍCH YấU CU

Nói về những tình huống hàng ngày

h/s nm c các câu nói dùng cho bắt đầu và kết thúc một cuộc hội thoại
Phát triển kĩ năng nói

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sách giáo khoa, giáo án

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10 H
10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

Viết từ mới của bài đọc hiểu
Trả lời các câu hỏi về bài đọc

</div>
(17)<div class='page_container' data-page=17>

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities 
1.Warm up

* Đa ra một đoạn hội thoại.

- You meet a friend at the bookshop. You are
very busy. What will you say to open and end 
the conversation?

Lan : ...(1)
Mai : Hi Lan. How are you ?

Lan : I'm fine. Thank you ! and you ?
Mai: I'm very well thanks. I haven't seen
you for a long time . let's go somewhere for a 
drink.

Lan :

Sorry ,...

. *Today, we'll practise speaking conversation
which has starting and closing sentences

Tro đổi theo cặp điền từ vào trỗ
trống

(1) Hello/ Hi, Mai

(2) I'm very busy now. I really 
have got to go now. Perhaps 
another time.

LuyÖn tËp theo cỈp

2. Task 1 :

đọc các câu và giúp h/s hiểu nghĩa

Yêu cầu h/s tìm ra các câu đẻ bắt đâu và kết
thúc cuộc hội thoại

- Good morning 
- How 's every thing 
at school ?

-Hello. How are 
you ?

-Hi . How is 
school ?

- Hello. What are you
doing ?

- Goodbye, see you 
later.

- Well. It's been nice 
talking to you .

- Sorry. I've got to go.
Talk to you later. 
- Great. I'll see you 
tomorrow.

- Catch you later.

đọc theo g/v

Thảo luận để tìm ra các câu đẻ bắt
đâu và kết thúc cuộc hội thoại

3. Task 2 :

đọc các câu trong doạn hội thoại và giúp h/s
hiểu nghĩa

Cho h/s làm việc theo cặp để xắp xếp lại doạn
hội thoại

Cho h/s luyÖn tËp däc cuéc häi tho¹i
1.D; 2F; 3B; 4.H; 5E; 6.C; 7.G; 8.A .

đọc theo giáo viên các câu trong
doạn hội thoại

làm việc theo cặp để xắp xếp lại
doạn hội thoại

luyện tập đọc cuộc họi thoại
4. Task 3

đọc các câu và giúp h/s hiểu nghĩa

A. Hello, Hoa . You don't look very happy
.what 's the matter with you ?

B: Hi, Nam . I feel tired. I've got a headache.
A: Sorry to hear that. I'd better go home and
have a rest

B: Yes. That's a good idea. Goodbye, Nam.
A: See you later

đọc theo G/V
điền vào chỗ trống

Luyện tập đọc theo cặp
5. Task 4 :

Cho h/s chọn chủ đề và tạo đoạn hội thoại
Gọi 2 cặp thực hiện doạn hội thoại

* The weather:

Hoạt động theo nhóm để thực
hiện

</div>
(18)<div class='page_container' data-page=18>

A. Hi, Nam. How was your trip to Vung tau?
B. Hi, Ba. It was wonderful ! I really enjoyed 
it .

A. What did you like most in Vung tau ?
B. The weather.

A. What was the weather like in VungTau? 
B. It was warm. I prefer the weather in Vung 
Tau to Nha Trang .

A. Oh, Really ? I love it, too

B. By the way , do you want to see my photos?
A. Sure/ of course.

trình bầy trờc lớp đoận hội thoại
của nhóm theo cặp

4 . Cñng cè

Nhắc lại các mẫu câu dùng trong cuộc hội thoại
1. Dặn dò

Luyện tập và chuẩn bị bài listening.

Ngày soạn:

10 / 9 /2010

UNIT 2 SCHOOL TALK 
 Period : 9 - Listening
I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s nghe hiểu các mẩu hội thoại liên quan đến sinh hoạt hàng ngày diễn ra trong
gia đình trờng học

Phát triển các kĩ năng nghe
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn băng đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10 H
10 I
 2. Kim tra bi c

Nêu các câu nói dùng cho bắt đầu và kết thúc một cuộc hội tho¹i
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up :(5')

* ®a ra mét sè c©u hái :

- what topics do you often talk at school ?
- Do you like football ? / your class ?
- How long are you staying there ?
- Are you enjoy listening lesson ?
- Would you like to drink a cup of tea ?

* Answer Qs : 
P1:

P2:
P3:
P4:
P5:
2. While you listen

Task 1 - Matching 
đ câu hỏi

Who are talking?
Where are they ?

What do you think they are talking about?
Bật băng một lần bốn đoậ hội thoại và yêu cầu

Theo cặp trả lời
Two young people

they are at the party

They are thinking about food and
drink

</div>
(19)<div class='page_container' data-page=19>

h/s ghép các đoận với tranh

+ Conversation 1 : Picture b 
 + Conversation 1 : Picture c 
 + Conversation 1 : Picture d
 + Conversation 1 : Picture a 
 Task 2 : answering questions

Cho h/s đọc các câu hi
Bt bng hai ln

Gọi h/s trả lời
Chũa bài víi c¶ líp
1. She takes English.

2. She is in Miss Lan Phuong's class.
3. He's at a party .

4. He stays there for a week 
5. No, She doesn't . She travels alone.
 Task 3 : Conversation completion 
Bật băng đoạn 4

Yêu cầu h/s so sánh kết quả và đọc đáp án
(1) it here (5) traveling

(2) very nice (6) no

(3) big (7) alone

(4) comfortable ( 8) for a drink

Nghe và ghép các đoạn với tranh

c cỏc câu hỏi để định hớng nội
dung cần nghe

tr¶ lêi các câu hỏi

Chũa bài

c on vn v chỳ ý cỏc t trc
ch trng

Nghe và điền từ thiếu

so sánh kết quả và nêu đáp án
4. After you listen: ( 5')

- Cho h/s thoả luận theo nhóm về các vấn đề:
difficulties in learning

Having bad marks
Being late for school
- đa gợi ý

What problems have you got at school ? 
What is the reason?

What have you done to solve it ? 
Who help you to solve it ?

EX

Hoạt động theo nhómđể thảo luận
bằng cách trả lời câu hỏi

Getting bad marks is the 
problem I have got at school . 
Because I am always nervous to 
present to the class ...

-Problem: getting bad marks 
 -Reasons: - don't learn lesson 
well.

- Get nervous 
 - Solve: Learn lesson well . 
listen to lecture carefully .
4 . Củng cố

Cho h/s nghe lại
5. Dặn dò

Chuẩn bị bài mới: writing

</div>
(20)<div class='page_container' data-page=20>

Sat, Sep 19th, 2008 UNIT 2 : SCHOOL TALKS
 Period 10 Lesson4 : Writing 
I.MC CH YấU CU

Hiểu và điền các thông tin cơ bản về bản thân vào phiếu cá nhân nh tên tuổi nghề
nghiệp quốc tịch

rốn luyn k nng vit đơn
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn một đơn mẫu
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
viÐt tõ míi ë bµi listening
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities 
1.Warmer :

Treo một đơn mẫu yuê cầu h/s trả lời câu hỏi:
What are they ?

When do you fill in a form ?

What sort of information do you often have to 
provide when you fill in a form?

Trả lời câu hỏi
P1: They are form

P2: Apply for a job; opening
accounts

P3: First name, surname, address,
age, job, marital status,..

2. Task 2 :

Cung cÊp tõ míi cho hs

Country of origin : Quê quán 
Present address : địa chỉ hiện tại 
Block capitals : Chữ vit hoa

Marital status : tình trạng hôn nhân 
Applicable : thÝch hỵp/ phï hỵp 
- híng dÉn h/s thùc hiƯn nhiƯm vơ

1 d ; 2.f; 3.e; 4.g; 5.b; 6.c; 
7.a.

chÐp tõ míi

Nèi các câu hỏi với các cụm từ
Nêu kết quả

Task 3 :

Gi¶I thÝch mét sè tõ míi

Write your name in block capitals 
Sign your name :

Delete where not applicable ( Xoá thông tin 
không thích hợp)

Put a cross if you are male 
Put a tick if you are female
Cho h/s tập điền và chữa lỗi

Học các cụm từ

Tập điền thông tin còn thiếu
Nhận xét và chữa lỗi

4. Task 4 : Fill in the form

Hớng dẫn và yêu cầu h/s hoàn thành mẫu đơn
Gọi học sinh lên bảng diền

</div>
(21)<div class='page_container' data-page=21>

1.Nguyen; 
2. Bao Hung ;

3. January 21st, 1988 
4. Vietnamese;

5. Vietnamese, English ;

6.Chua 11, Yen Lap town, Phu Tho; 
 7.Student ;

8.Business, pleasure, exams, others; 
9. 4 hours;

10. May 22nd, 2006 .

thân

nhận xét bài làm trên bảng và
chữa lỗi

4. Cñng cè

* Cho h/s nhắc lại về các thông tin cần điền vào một đơn .

5.Dặn dò

* cung cp mt đơn mẫu và yêu cầu h/s về nhà điền :

</div>
(22)<div class='page_container' data-page=22>

Student information

Full name: ...Mmale . Female
Date of birth: ... Nationality……….:.
Home address:...Tel: ...

Email: ...

Grade:... ... School :...
Where have you studied English? What level :

</div>
(23)<div class='page_container' data-page=23></div>
(24)<div class='page_container' data-page=24>

Ngày soạn; 11/9/2010

UNIT 2 : SCHOOL TALK
 Period 11 : Language focus 
I.MỤC CH YấU CU

Phân biệt 2 âm /^/ và /a:/

Cách sử dụng gerund và to infinitive
Luyện tập kĩ năng làm bài tËp

đọc đợc các âm có trong các câu và làm các bài tập trong sách
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn băng đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H

10 I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 Kh«ng

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

I. Pronunciation : (5')

Bật băng cho h/s nghe sau đó giới thiệu
/^/ : is very short sound . first practice the
sound /

Then put your tongue back a little.

/ a:/ : is long sound . First pronounce the sound/
a:/ then put your tongue down and back.

Bật băng cho h/s nghe và nhắc lại
Gọi một số h/s đọc v sa

Nghe và nhận xét về 2 âm

nghe v nhắc lại
đọc và sửa lỗi
II. Grammar and vocabulary :

1 . exercise 1 Make Qs for the following 
responses.

Hớng dẫn và yêu cầu h/s đặt câu hỏi dạng
wh - question dựa vào các câu trả lời
Chữa lỗi

1. When did you come back from HCM 
City?

2. How long did you stay there? 
3. Who did you come with?
4. Where did you live?

5. Why do you learn English? 
6. What time is it ?

7. How many children have they got ?

Hoạt động theo cặp

đọc các câu trả lời và đặt câu hỏi
Viết câu hi lờn bng

Chữa bài

Exercise 2 :

The infinitive and ing form.

- The verbs can only be followed by
to-infinitive:

Agree; refuse; manage; fail; 
decide; plan; hope; expect; 
seem; tend.

- The verbs can only be followed by - ing form
:

Nghe giảng và ghi vở

</div>
(25)<div class='page_container' data-page=25>

Enjoy; avoid; mind; consider; 
practice; miss; postpone; risk; 
Notes:

* Remember to do smt : (in the future.)
 Remember doing smt : (in the past )
* Stop to do smt : refer to a purpose

Stop doing smt : V-ing is object of the verb 
 * Forget to do smt : action in the future .
 Forget doing smt : refer to the past 
* Regret to do smt : refer to future or present 
 Regret doing smt : Refer to present or past.
 * Try to do smt means make effort “ “
 Try doing smt means experiment “ ”
Yêu cầu h/s làm bài và nêu đáp án

(1) to hear (6) to pay 
(2) going (7) to go 
(3)remembering (8) visiting

(4) doing (9) seeing 
(5) worrying (10) hearing

Làm bài tập theo nhóm nhỏ
Trao đổi két quả, nêu đps án

Exercise 3 :

- Yêu cầu h/s làm bài và nêu đáp án
1: to go 6. making
2. Waiting 7. to call
3. having 8. to lend 
4.find 9. talking 
 5. living 10. to post

Lµm bµi tËp

Trao đổi két quả, nêu đps án

4. Củng cố

Nhắc lại kiến thức trọng tâm
5. Dặn dò

Làm lại các bài tập, chuẩn bị bài mới Unit 3- reading

Ngày soạn: 16/9/2010 UNIT 3 : People's background
 Period 12: Reading

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Cung cÊp tõ míi vỊ lai lÞch cđa mét ngêi

Làm các bài tập liên quan đến nội dung bài đọc
Phát triển các kĩ năng đọc hiểu

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn băng đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 Kh«ng kiĨm tra

3. Bài mới

</div>
(26)<div class='page_container' data-page=26>

Teacher's activities Ps' activities
 1. Before you read:

Yêu cầu h/s trả lời các câu hỏi

- Can you name some scientists and their
specializations?

- Have you ever heard of Marie Curie?
What do you know about her?

ihạt ng theo cp hi v tr li

Trìng bầy trớc lớp

- She is the famous scientist in
the world, she discovered radium,
she was a famous French

physicist.
2. While you read :

- d¹y tõ míi:

General education (n)

Brilliant (a) Quick at learning.

Mature (a) Developed in character and power.
Harbour the dream of : keep in mind the dream
of smt with Plying colors : TN đại học loại u.
PhD: Doctor of philosophy: tiến sĩ triết học
Tragic death: die painfully: cái chết bi kịch
To be awarded: to be present with . đoạt giải
Atomic weight of radium : Trọng lợng nguyên
tử

Humanitarian wish : mong ớc nhân đạo

- Listen to the teacher
- Read in chorus
- Repeat

- Copy in their books
Task 1 :

Bật đài cho h/s nghe và đọc thầm theo băng
Hớng dẫn h/s làm bài

Cho h/s thảo luận theo cặp

Gi mt s h/s nờu đáp án và chữa bài cùng cả
lớp

1.C ; 2.e; 3.A; 4.D, 5.

- nghe và đọc thầm theo băng
- đọc các từ ,cụm từ đoán nghĩa
theo nội dung bài đọc và làm bài
- thảo luận đáp án theo cặp
- nêu đáp án và chữa bài
 Task 2:

- cho h/s đọc các câu trong bài tập hớng dẫn 
cách làm bài

Gọi h/s nêu đáp án và nhận xét và chữa chung
1.T;

2.F ( her dream was to become a scientist.)
3.T;

4.F ( she married Pierre Curie )
 5. T

đọc các câu trong bài tập sau đó
đọc lại bài khố tìm thơng tin và
làm bài

nêu đáp án và nhận xét và giảI
thích tại sao sai

Task 3: Answering Qs.

Cho h/s làm bài gọi 1 học sinh lên bảng viết
câu trả lời

Yêu cầu một số h/s trả lời miệng các câu trả lời
1. Marrie was born in Warsaw on November 7,
1867.

2. She was a brilliant and mature student.
3. She worked as a private tutor to save money
for a study tour aboard.

4. She was awarded a Nobel prize in Chemistry
for determining the atomic weight of radium.
5. No, it wasn't. Her real joy was “ easing
human suffering

Làm bài và thảo luận về đáp án và
nêu dáp án

Gãp ý , nhËn xÐt vÒ câu trả lời
trên bảng

1. Củng cố 
.

đọc lại từ mới và tóm tỏt v tiu s ca Marie Curie
2. Dn dũ

Làm phần after you read . học từ mới
Chuẩn bị bài mới: speaking

</div>
(27)<div class='page_container' data-page=27>

Ngày soạn: 17/9/2010 UNIT 3 : People's background
 Period 13: speaking

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Cung cÊp tõ míi vỊ lai lÞch cđa mét ngêi

Hỏi và trả lời vềlai lịch cá nhân , nói đợc về lai lịch bản thân và ngời khác
Phát triển các kĩ năng nói

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sách giáo khoa, giáo án

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG

1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

kiểm tra từ mới trong bài đọc hiểu
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities
1, Task 1:

Yêu cầu cá nhân h/s thực hiện bài tập và
thảo luận

Gi h/s nờu kết quả nêu kết quả thảo luận
Nêu đáp án

- Family , education , experience.
Yêu cầu h/s đặt câu hỏi cho chủ đề.
Gợi ý câu hỏi:

Family:

How many people are there ...?
 What does father do?

Education:

Where did you study at high school?
What subjects do you like best?
 What degree do you have? 
Experience:

How long have you work as a doctor ?
 What experience do you have?

cá nhân h/s thực hiện bài tập và thảo
luận

nêu kết quả nêu kết quả th¶o luËn
Gãp ý kiÕn

đặt câu hỏi và trả lời cho chủ đề.

2, Task 2 :

-åich h/s ch¬I trò phỏng vấn với bạn
chép các gợi ý lên bảng vµ híng dÉn h/s
thùc hiƯn

+ Greeting: good morning/hello

Hoạt động theo cặp để vào vai thực
hiện cuộc phỏng vn

Thực hiện phỏng vấn với 1 bạn khác
trong lớp

</div>
(28)<div class='page_container' data-page=28>

+ Date of birth: When were you born?
+ Place of birth: Where were you born?
+ Home: where do you live?

+ Parents: Could you tell me smth about
your parents? / what does your

father/mother do?

-Brother(s)/sister(s): How many brothers
have you got? / what does your

brother/sister do?

-Primary/secondary school: Have you ever
been a leader of ...?/ which

primary/secondary school did you go to?
-School words: what did you do at school?/
Did you join all school actvities?

-Favourite subject : What subject do you
like best ? / what's your favourite subject ?
-Thanking: Thank you very much/ thanks a
lot

- Provide special expressions to help Ps:
+ Hello, nice to meet you

+ Since when have you studied at this 
school?

+ Could you tell me smth about 
your……?

+Let me see..

+ Oh, good/Oh, yes.
+ I think it's time to stop.

+Thank you very much/ thank you 
for………

+That's very interesting

B- Hello, nice to meet you.
A- Where're you from?

B- I'm from Yen Lap secondary
school.

A- How long have you learnt at this
school?

B- I've learnt at this schoolfor a year.
A- Who is your class teacher?

B- Miss/Mrs/Mr……..

A- Oh, could you tell me smth about
you?

B- I'm a pupil in 10H, my birthday
is……, I live in…..with…… ……, .
A- Oh,yes. What subjects do you like
best?

B- My favourite subjects are
Maths……..

A- Which topics do you often talk
about at school?

B- We often talk about our studying,
.

……

A- What about your family? What
does your father/mother do?

B- My father is a teacher, he works in
a secondary school and my mother is a
doctor, she works in a local

hospital………

A- Oh, it is now10 oclock, I think it's
time to stop our talk. Thank you for

giving me time.

B- There's nothing, that is very
interesting. Good bye

A- Good bye.
3, Task 3

-yêu cầu h/s nói về ngời mà các em đã
phỏng vấn

Gọi đại diện nhóm trình bầy trớc lớp.
Example:

The person I havejust interviewed is Lien. 
She was born in 1995 in Yên Lâp Town . In
her family there are 4 people, her father 
was a worker he was retire 3 years ago. 
Her mother is a doctor she works in a 
local hospital and her sister graduated 
from a university and she has been

working for a foreign company in HaNoi.
And Lien, she is a good Pupil in our class, 
she often abtains a lot of hight marks in 
Maths, Physics and Chemistry……..

Hoạt động theo nhóm và nói về ngời
đã phỏng vấn

nói về ngời mà các em đã phỏng vấn

4. Cđng cè

Nh¾c lại các chủ điểm cần có trong khi nói về lai lịch bản thân và ngời khác
 5. Dặn dò

Học lại bài và chuẩn bị bài mới : listening

Ngày soạn: 18/9/2010 UNIT 3 : People's background
 Period 14: Listening

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp học sinh nghe lấy thông tin về một giảI vô địch Olympic
Cung cấp từ mới về giảI vô địch Olympic

</div>
(29)<div class='page_container' data-page=29>

Học sinh thực hiện đợc yêu cầu của bài nghe là lựa chọn thông tin đúng / sai và điền thông
tin bỏ ngỏ

Phát triển các kĩ năng nghe
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn băng đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I

2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

kiĨm tra tõ míi trong bµi nãi

thực hiện một đoạn hội thoại về lai lịch cá nh©n
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities 
1. Before you listen

+cho h/s trả lời một số câu hỏi

- What do you know about Olympic?
- When did it start?

- Do you know any Olympic champion? 
- Can you name any Olympic champion?
- What would you like to know about these 
people?

(his/her family, background, career success,
medals?)

-gi¶I thÝch mét sè tõ míi:

- Diploma (n) High school diploma : b»ng cÊp
- Certificate (n) marriage/ birth certificate.
chøng chØ

- Degree(n) trình độ/bằng (Bachelor's degree:

bằng cử nhân, Master's degree: bằng thạc sĩ)
- Sports teacher(n) a teacher who teach sports 
- Romatic (n) lóng mn

*bật băng cho h/s nghe và yêu cầu nhắc lại theo
băng.

Hot động theo cặp để hỏi và trả
lời

chÐp tõ míi

Nghe và nhắc lại theo băng
đọc từ mới

2. While you listen:
Task 1 : true or false

-Híng dÉn h/s thực hiện nhiệm vụ
Bật băng 2 lợt

Cho h/s trao đổi về đáp án và gọi nêu dáp ấn
Bật băng lại và chữa bài

1 T

2 T

3 F I don't have much free 
time

4 T

5 F I want to be a sport 
teacher

đọc các câu

nghe và ghi các thông tin trao đổi
về đáp án và nêu dáp ấn

Task 2: Gap filling:

-cho h/s đọc doạn văn thiếu và bật băng
Gọi h/s nêu đáp án

1. General education 2. lives / 
family

3. different / swimming 4. love stories

đọc doạn văn thiu

Nghe và điền thông tin thiếu

</div>
(30)<div class='page_container' data-page=30>

5. Teacher's diploma.
3. After you listen:

đa ra một số thông tin về Sally và yêu cầu đặt
câu hỏi và trả lời:

1-Olympic champion
2-1980

3-local schools
4-15

5-Family
6-free time

7-Basketball and swimming
8-sports teacher

9- teacher's diploma

gọi vài cặp trình bầy trớc líp

- hoạt động theo cặp hỏi và trả lời
về sally

1- Is she an Olympic champion?
2- When was she born?

3- Where did she get a general 
education?

4- What did she do when she was 
15?

5- Who does she live with?

6- Has she got many free time?
7- What sports does she like?
8- Who does she want to be in 
future?

9- Does she want to get the 
teacher s diploma?’

4.Cñng cè :

-cho h/s đọc lại từ mới và nghe lạiđoạn hội thoại .

5.Dặn dò :

học từ mới và chuẩn bị bài mới: writing.

Ngày soạn: 23/9/2010 UNIT 3 : People's background
 Period 15: Writing

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s nghiên cứu một bản khai về bản thân của ơng Brown từ đó nắm đợc các điểm chính
cần cố trong bản sơ yếu lí lịch , viết đợc một đoạn về ông Brown

Cuối bài học h/s có thể ghi đợc bản khai và sử dụng thông tin trong bản khai để viết về lai
lịch của một bạn trong lớp

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sách giáo khoa, giáo án

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

kiĨm tra tõ míi trong bµi nghe 
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1.Warm up:

-viết bảng thông tin lên bảng cho h/s nối A vµ B

A B

1.name a. Boston

- hoạt động theo cặp nối A và B

</div>
(31)<div class='page_container' data-page=31>

2. Date of birth
3. Place of birth

4. School

attended

5.Exams passed
6. Previous jobs 
7. Interests

b. Kensington High 
school

c. E. French, math .
d. Tourist guide-hotel 
telephonist

e. David Brown
f. 12/11/69

g. Music and dancing 
-chữa và cung cấp đáp án:

1.e; 2.f ; 3a; 4.b; 5.c ; 6.d; 
7.g .

- Leadin

Where do you often see these information ?
Today. We study the way of writing a C.V .

Nêu đáp án

Task 1

Cho h/s đọc bản khai của ơng Brown và giảI
thích một số từ mới :

C.V = curriculum vitae (n)/resume: bản lí lịch 
Attend (v)tham dự

Pass exams (v) thi

Previous jobs: (n) nghỊ tríc

đọc bản khai của ơng Brown
chép - đọc từ mới

* cung cÊp mÉu vµ cho h/s điền với các thông 
tin về ông Brown :

David Brown was born ... ...in
Boston.

He attended ... 
School

passed...,...,... ...He 
worked as a... ...for a travel

agency from ... to ... and 
from ... to ... ..., He

worked as a...

He

likes ...
-gọi h/s nêu đáp án và chữa bài bọi h/s khác
đọc và dịch nghĩa đoạn văn

-điền thông tin thiếu nêu đáp án.
on November 12th,1969

/Kensington Hight School
/exams in English,French

Mathematics/tourist guide/June 
1991/December 1998/March 
1999/May 2002/hotel

telephone/music and dancing

Task 2: Write a C.V

-- cho h/s hoạt động theo cặp để điền vào bản
khai dựa vào phn 1

- hớng dẫn h/s ghi các thông tin

- hoạt động theo cặp để điền vào
bản khai dựa vào phần 1

đọc bản khai cho cả lớp nghe và
bổ xung

Task 3: Write a paragraph about your 
partner's parent.

-cho h/s viªt vỊ bè mĐ của bạn mình dựa vào
bản khai

Gọi h/s viết lên bảng và các em khác góp ý
nhận xét .

Ex: Mr... was born on 12th December 1967

in ...

He worked as a driver from June 1978 to July 
1988, after that, he changed his job and

worked for a company near his home, he retied
in 2005. He likes playing chess and playing 
football...

-. viªt vỊ bè mĐ cđa bạn mình
dựa vào bản khai

Trình bầy kết quả lên bảng
Nhận xét và gop ý sửa lỗi

</div>
(32)<div class='page_container' data-page=32>

4. Củng cố :

- Nói lại cách viết một bản khai về cá nhân.
5. Dặn dò:

- Học lại bài ,chuẩn bị bài mới: Writing.

Ngày soạn: 24/9/2009

UNIT 3 : People's background
 Period 16 - Language focus

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s phân biệt đợc 2 âm /e / và / ổ / và ơn lại thì q khứ hồn thành
h/s phát âm đúng 2 âm /e / và / ổ / và làm đợc các bài tập

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn băng đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

kiĨm tra tõ míi trong bµi viÕt 
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

I. Pronunciation:

-đọc mẫu từng âm va hớng dẫn cách phát âm .
/ e /: is a short sound, the first pronounce the
sound / i / then open your mouth a little more.
/ ổ /: the first pronounce the sound /e/ then
open your mouth a little more.

- bật băng cho h/s nghe và nhắc lại
Gọi h/s đọc và nhạn xét

Bật băng cho h/s nghe các câu và cho h/s đọc
theo

Gọi h/s dọc và chú ý đến các am /e/ và / ổ /

Nghe g/v đọc và chú ý đến cách
phát âm

nghe và nhắc lại theo băng
đọc và nhạn xét

Nghe và đọc theo băng
đọc các câu và nhận xét
II. Grammar : The past perfect.

Viết ví dụ lên bảng yêu cầu h/s đọc và nêu 
cách thành lập thì quá khứ hoàn thành

- I had done all my home work before 7 P.M 
last night

- We had finished dinner before they came.
Form: S + had + P.P + O

Use :

* The past perfect tense can be used to

describe an action before a point of time in the

Nghiªn cøu ví dụ và nêu cách
thành lập , cách sử dông

</div>
(33)<div class='page_container' data-page=33>

past.

* Describe an action that happened before 
another one

Notes : Using when , before , after.
Adverbs: already, just , ever.
The past perfect + the simple past:

* When 2 actions heppen in the past, which
action happen before using the past perfect. 
Which action happen after using the simple 
past.

- When I arrived Ann had just left

- I had finished my homework before I went to 
bed

Or: After I went to bed I had already finished 
my homework

1) Exercise 1

Yêu càu h/s làm bài và lu ý đến cách dùng thì
q khứ hồn thành

gị h/s nêu đáp án và cho h/.s nhận xét
Chữa bài

chÐp bµi vµ lÊy vÝ dơ

- làm bài tập theo cặp
Thảo luận và nêu đáp án

1. had broken 2. had done 
3. had met

4. hadn't turned 5. had ever 
seen 6. had been

7. had left 8. had moved 
9. hadn't seen 10. had

broken in

2) Exercise 2:

Yêu cầu h/s làm bài và lu ý phân biệt cách
dùng thì q khứ hồn thành và thì q khứ đơn
Gọi h/s nêu đáp án và cho h/.s nhn xột

Chữa bài

Do exercise 2:
c v lm bài

Thảo luận và nêu đáp án
1. Had just finished / came 
2. had seldom traveled / went 
3. went/ had already taken 
4. Did you manage / had he 
gone / got

5. had just got / phoned / had 
been.

3) Exercise 3: Find 5 mistakes and check them.
Yêu cầu h/s đọc bài để hiểu rõ tình huống và
lu ý phân biệt cách dùng thì q khứ hồn
thành và thì quá khứ đơn

Cho h/s thảo luận về đáp án và nêu đáp án
Chữa bài và nhận xét

đọc đoạn văn và làm bài

Thảo luận và nêu đáp án
1. had climbed -- climbed 
2. had turned ---- turned
3. had called ---- called
4. had heard --- heard
5. went --- had already gone 
4. Củng cố :

.nhắc lại về ngữ âm và ngữ pháp.
5. Dặn dò :

Häc cÊu tróc c¸ch dïng làm lại bài tập

Híng dÉn h/s lµm bµi . “ Test yourself A tại nhà

Ngày soạn : 2/10/2010

Period 17 : Test your self a 
I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/a kiểm tra lại kiến thức đã học trong bài 1,2,3 về ngữ âm , ngữ pháp và từ vựng
Phát triển kỹ năng làm bài kiểm tra để chuẩn bị cho kiểm tra 1 tiết

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn băng đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG

</div>
(34)<div class='page_container' data-page=34>

1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

kiÓm tra tõ míi trong bµi 3
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Listening

Cho h/s đọc và tìm từ mới
Giải thích từ mới .

- fall in love: yêu , phải lòng
- get married : kết hon

- The black freedom movement: phong trµo tù do of ngời
da đen

Cho h/s xem bảng trớc khi nghe
Bật băng cho h/s nghe 3 lần
ChÃ bài và nêu biểu điểm :

1. 15th, January

1929
2. in 1951
3. for 4 years

4. he met

5. they got married

6. a minister at 
7. the black freedom 
movement

8. heard his speech at the 
9. in 1964

10. 4th, April 1968

đọc và tìm từ mới.

đọc kĩ bảng thơng tin

Nghe lấy thông tin , kiểm tra
lại và viết đáp án

2. Reading

Cho h/s thảo luận theo nhóm về lời giảI
Giúp đỡ về từ vựng

Gọi h/s nêu ỏp ỏn

ChÃ bài và nêu biểu điểm
 1. F 
 2. C

3. A

4. D 
 5.B

th¶o ln theo nhãm vỊ lêi
gi¶i

Nêu đáp án

3. Grammar:

Cho h/s thảo luận theo nhóm về đáp án
Gọi h/s nêu đáp án

Ch· bài và nêu biểu điểm
1. to apply

2. am 
3. attended 
4. passed

5. got 
6. can 
7. reading

8. know
9. am able
10. hearing

Notes: be good at + Ving / N

Look forward to + ving from ...

th¶o ln theo nhãm vỊ lêi
gi¶i

Nêu đáp án

4. Writing

Yen lap Town ,
Yen Lap Districts

</div>
(35)<div class='page_container' data-page=35>

Viet nam 
Dear Sally,

I am very delighted to be your pen friend. I'm sixteen 
years old and I am only 1,50 meters tall. I've got dark , 
short hair and black eyes. I live in chua 11 village with my
parents and younger sister. She is a pupil at thi tran 1 
Primary school. I am a student at Yen Lap High School. It 
is a small school in Yen Lap district . My school is large 
and has many green trees. There are about one thousands 
students and fifty teachers in my school. I study many 
subjects: English, Chemistry, Physics, ..I like English best 
because I want to sing E. songs . I go to school in the 
morning and have 5 periods everyday from 7.15 to 11.30 . 
In the afternoon I study at home and help my parents with 
housework.

I'm looking forward to hearing from you soon.
 Yours truly,
Phong

Nhận xét về bài viết của bạn

4.Cñng cè

Nhắc lại về ngữ pháp trong bài 
5. Dặn dß

- Ôn tập chuẩn bị cho kiểm tra 1 tiết .

Ngày so¹n : 1/10/2010

Period 18 : written Test 
I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Kiểm tra lại kiến thức đã học trong bài 1,2,3 về ngữ âm , ngữ pháp và từ vựng
Phát triển kỹ năng làm bài kiểm tra

đánh giá kết quả học tập của h/s từ đó tìm ra điểm mạnh và điểm yếu của h/s để có biện pháp
bổ sung kịp thời

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
đề kiểm tra

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 Kh«ng kiĨm tra 
 3. Bài mới

QUESTIONS

Part 1 Choose A,B.C or D to complete the following sentences.
C©u 1. Would you mind ... the window?

A. opened B. opening C. opens D. to open
C©u 2. The teacher told the boys to stop ... football.

A. played B. play C. to play D. playing
C©u 3. My farther hate ... a tie to work.

</div>
(36)<div class='page_container' data-page=36>

A. wear B. wearing C. to wear D. worn

C©u 4. My sister usually practices ... the piano in the morning.
A. to play B. played C. plays D. playing
C©u 5. We are contented ... our exam results.

A. in B. of C. with D. by

C©u 6. What lesson do you have ... 8.30 a.m on Tuesday.

A. at B. in C. on D. of

C©u 7. I love ... my mother with the housework.
A. helped B. to help C. helping D. help
C©u 8. She ... on well with her friends.

A. takes B. does C. comes D. gets

C©u 9. After lunch , I often ... a rest.

A. go B. take C. give D. get

C©u 10. My brother ... me last month.

A. visit B. visits C. visiting D. visited
Part 2 Write the correct tense of verbs in the brakets in the gaps
C©u 11. We had had lunch before they (come) ………...

C©u 12. He often ( watch) ... Football when he is on free time .
C©u 13. They ( start) ... to learn English 4 years ago.

C©u 14. He went to England after he ( study) ... English for two
years.

C©u 15. We often ( go ) ... .. to bed late .But yesterday we (go) ... to
bed very early

Part 3 Pick out the words which pronunced differently the rest

C©u 16. A. cat B. fat C. said D. sat

C©u 17. A. sunny B. garden C. father D. star
C©u 18. A. love B. subject C. guitar D. study

C©u 19. A. said B. man C. pen D. send

C©u 20. A. miss B. read C. hit D. kick

Part 4 Read the following passage carefully and answer the questions below
Fishing is my favourist pastime. At weekends, I usually spent hours on
the river without catching anything. Some of my friends say " you should
give up fishing, it is a waste of time ", but they don't know that I'm not
realy fond of fishing. I'm only fond of sitting alone in a boat and doing
nothing.

C©u 21. What do you usually do at weekends ?

.
………
C©u 22. What is your favourite pastime ?

.
………
C©u 23. What aren't you really fond of?

..
………
C©u 24. What do some of your friends say ?

.
………
C©u 25. What are you only fond of?

.
………

4. Dặn dò

Chuẩn bị bài mới : unit 4 – special education

</div>
(37)<div class='page_container' data-page=37>

Ngµy so¹n : 9/10/2010

Period 22

: Test correction

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s phát hiện ra lỗi sai trong bài kiểm tra và cách chữa , củng cố lại kiến thức cho h/s 
Phát triển kỹ năng làm bµi kiĨm tra

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sách giáo khoa, giáo án

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 Kh«ng kiĨm tra 
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1.Warm up :

- Is the test difficult or easy ?

- What sentences do you feel most difficult?
- What points did you consolidate ?

Trả lời câu hái

2. Part I :

- Yêu cầu h/s xác định đáp án đúng .
- giải thích và chữa bài:

1.B, 2.D, 3.B, 4D, 5.B, 6.A, 7C. 8.D 9.B 10.D
Notes: - After preposition is a Ving

- A lot of + uncountable noun + V(s/ es)
- Conditional type two.

- Preposition

Xác định đáp án đúng
, giảI thích cho đáp án
Chép bài

3. Part II :

- Yêu cầu h/s xác định đáp án đúng .
- giảI thích và chữa bài:

11. came 12. had studied 13. watches 14. 
started 15. go/went

Xác định đáp án
đúng , giảI thích cho
đáp án

ChÐp bµi
4. part III:

- Yêu cầu h/s xác định đáp án đúng .
- giảI thích và chữa bài:

16.D, 17. A, 18.C 19.B, 20B

Xác định đáp án
đúng , giảI thích cho
đáp án

ChÐp bµi

</div>
(38)<div class='page_container' data-page=38>

* Part IV :

- Gäi h/s viÕt l¹i câu lên bảng
- Chữa bài

21.I usually spend hours on the river without catching
anything .

22.My favourite is fishing
23. I am not fond of fishing.

24. Some of my friends say that I should give up fishing, it
is waste of time.

25. I am only fond ofsitting alone in a boat and doing
nothing.

Xác định đáp án
đúng , giảI thích cho
đáp án

ChÐp bµi

4. Cñng cè:

Nhắc lại các loại ngữ pháp h/s lµm sai nhiỊu:
5. Dặn dò:

Chuẩn bị bài mới : Unit 4 - (reading)

</div>
(39)<div class='page_container' data-page=39>

Ngày soạn : 1/10/2010 Unit 4: Special education
Period 19 : Reading

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s đọc hiể đoạn văn , cung cấp từ mới và cụm từ liên quan đến giáo dục đặc biệt
h/s hiể bài và làm đợc các phần bài tập trong bài đọc

phát triển kỹ năng đọc hiểu
II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn băng đài
III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I

2. Kiểm tra bài cũ
 Kh«ng kiĨm tra 
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities 
I: Before you read

* yêu cầu h/s liệt kê các hot ng thng lm
gỡ hng

Yêu cầu h/s trả lời câu hỏi

- which activities do you think would be
difficult for dumb, blind and deaf people?

cho h/s xem bảng và tìm từ bªn díi

Cung cấp từ mới
Disabled: tàn tật
Dumb: câm

Mentally retarded:chậm phát triển trí tuệ
Proper schooling: học hành đầy đủ
Opposition: s phn i

Gradually:dần dần
Effort:nỗ lực

Time-consuming: tốn nhiều thời gian
Demonstration: sù thĨ hiƯn , thut minh
Add:céng

Subtract:trõ

Be proud of: tù hµo

Hoạt động theo bàn liệt kê các hoạt
động thng lm hng ngy

Trả lời câu hỏi

xem bng chữ nổi và tìm từ bên dới
lên bảng ghi từ vùa tìm đợc

WE ARE THE WORLD

II. While you read :

-bật băng cho h/s nghe 1 lợt và đọc thầm
1. Tast 1

Yêu cầu h/s lựa chọn các định nghĩa đùng với
các từ đã cho chú ý đến nghĩa của từ trong
ngôn cảnh

Giúp h/s hiểu nghĩ của từng định nghĩa và chữa
bài

nghe băng và đọc thầm bài đọc

đọc các định nghĩa và tìm từ thich hộp
Thảo luận theo cặp và đa ra đáp án

</div>
(40)<div class='page_container' data-page=40>

1.C 2.E 3A 4B 5 D
Cho h/s đặt câu với các từ

2. Task 2:

Yêu cầu h/s đọc lại bài khoá , đọc các câu
trong bài tập và tìm thơng tin trong bài đọc để
chọn đáp án

Gọi h/s lên bảng viết đáp án và cho h/s khỏc
nhn xột

Chữa bài cùng cả lớp

1.d 2.b 3.a 4.c 5.d

Đặt câu víi c¸c tõ

Đọc lại bài khố , đọc các câu trong bài
tập và tìm thơng tin trong bài đọc để
chọn đáp án

Thảo luận về đàp án vừa chọn

lên bảng viết đáp án và h/s khác nhận

xét

3. After you read:(10')

Yêu cầ h/s đoc đoạn văn thiếu và tìm từ vùa
học để điền vào chỗ trống

Gọi h/s lên bảng viết đáp án và cho h/s khỏc
nhn xột

Chữa bài cùng cả lớp
- Suggestion:

1.disabled 2.read 3. write 4.efforts 
5.opposition 6.time-consuming 7.maths 
8.arms 9.fingers 10.pround

Cho h/s dịch đoạn văn ra tiếng việt

oc đoạn văn thiếu và tìm từ vùa học
để điền vào chỗ trống

Thảo luận về đàp án vừa chọn

lên bảng viết đáp án và h/s khác nhận
xét

Dịch bài
4. Củng cố

c li t mi cho h/s núi lại nội dung bài học
5. Dặn dò

Học từ mới , đọc lại bài
Chuẩn bị bài mới : Speaking

Ngày soạn : 2/ 10/ 2010

Unit 4: Special education

Period 20

: Speaking

I.MỤC CH YấU CU

Giúp h/s hỏi và trả lời các thông tin về việc học tập tại trờng
Nói về công việc học tập của mình và của ngời khác

Phát triển các kỹ năng nói
II. THIT B GING DY 
Sỏch giáo khoa, giáo án

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Này dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

kiểm tra từ mới trong bài đọc

3. Bài mới

</div>
(41)<div class='page_container' data-page=41>

Teacher's activities Ps' activities 
1. Warm up

Đa ra các câu hỏi .

- What are your favourist subjects?
- Which one didn’t you like?

- How much time do you often prepare for a
lesson every day?

- What kind of tests do you have at school?

Hot ng theo nhúm tr lũi cỏc cõu
hi

Nêu câu trả lời và nhận xét
- Subjects (English,

literature,history,physics,geography,
biology,chemistry,physical

education, information

technology,maths,Civic education ) 
- Tests ( oral test, fithteen-minute
test, 45 minute test, term test, final 
test )

2. Task 1:

- Giới thiệu yêu cầu của bài
GiảI thích tõ míi

To be honest: nãi that lµ ...

Final examination ( n) thi tốt nghiệp
gọi h/s đọc to đoạn hội thoại trớc lớp

A4 B1 C2 D6 E3 F5 G7

Đọc các câu hỏi của bài phỏng vấn
Thảo luân để chon các câu điền vào
chỗ trống

đọc to cuộc phỏng vấn trớc lớp
h/s khác nhận xét và chữa bài

3. Task 2:

- viêt các câu hỏi trong bài phỏng vấn theo 
đúng trật tự lên bảng

Cho h/s hỏi và trả lời theo các câu hỏi đó
đóng vai làm ngời phỏng vấn thực hiện mẫu
với 1 h/s

-hoạt động theo cp

hỏi và trả lời theo các câu hỏi trên
bảng

Thc hin i vai v ghi chộp
những thông tin vừa hỏi đợc
4.Task 3

- cho h/s chuẩn bị để nói về những điều mà

họ vừa phỏng vấn Chuẩn bị để nói về những điều vừa phỏng vấn
đứng trớc lớp nói

4. Cñng cè

Gọi h/s lên bảng nói các câu hỏi về việc häc ë trêng
5. Dặn dò

Học các mẫu câu hỏi và cách trả lời, chuẩn bị bài mới : listening

</div>
(42)<div class='page_container' data-page=42>

Ngày soạn : 7/10/2010

Unit 4: Special education

Period 21 :

listening

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s nghe lấy các thông tin về 1 lớp học đặc biẹt dành cho trẻ khuyết tật
Cuối bài nghe h/s có thể nghe đợc các thơng tin để làm các phần bài tập
Phát triển các kỹ năng nghe

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn , băng đài
 III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

kiểm tra từ mới trong bài nói, thực hiện đoạn hội thoại hỏi đáp về việc học ở cấp 2
3. Bài mới

Teacher s activities ’ Ps activities ’
1. Before you listen:

- gi¶i thÝch nghÜa của các từ trong khung 
photographer(n) ngời nhiếp ảnh,

photograph(v,n) nhiếp ¶nh/tÊm ¶nh,
photography(n) nghỊ nhiÕp ¶nh,

photographic(adj) nghƯ tht nhiÕp ¶nh,
photogenic(adj) ăn ảnh

- yờu cu h/s in vo tr trng bằng 1 từ thích hợp
- gọi h/s đọc to đáp án của mình và gọi h/s khác nhận xét
 1. photographic . 2. photography.

3. photographer . 4. photograph
5. Photogenic .

chÐp bµi

Hoạt động theo bàn để
điền vào trỗ trống bằng 1
từ thích hợp

- đọc to đáp án của mình và
gọi h/s khác nhận xét

* Vocabulary Pre-teach:

-Surroundings(n): m«I trêng xung quan) 
- Sorrow(n) nỗi buồn

- passion (n) niềm đam mê.

- labourer (n) ngi lao ng ph thụng.

chép bài

</div>
(43)<div class='page_container' data-page=43>

- mute (a) c©m

- Exhibition( n) ( triĨn l·m )

- Stimulate(v) khuyen khich , thóc ®Èy
- lens(n) ống kính máy ảnh .

- take in(v) nm bt c.
- Comprise (v)bao gồm.

Bật băng cho h/s nghe và nhắc lại theo băng
Gọi h/s đọc các từ mới

nghe và nhắc lại theo băng
đọc các từ mới

3. While you listen: 
Task 1: True or false:

- giảI thích yêu cầu của bài nghe cho h/s
- cho h/s đọc và hiẻu các câu trong task 1

Bật băng cho h/s nghe 2 lợt và viết các thông tin nghe đợc
liên quan đến các câu

Cho h/s thảo luận theo cặp để chọ đáp án
Gọi h/s nêu đáp án

Bật băng lại để chữa bài cùng cả lớp
 1. T

2. F ( Infor. Not given) 
 3. T

4. F ( The subjects of their photos about people and 
scenery. )

5. T

đọc các câu trong task 1
Nghe và viết các thông tin
nghe đợc liên quan đến các
câu

Thảo luận theo cặp để chọn
đáp ỏn

Nờu ỏp ỏn

Chữa bài cùng cả lớp
* Task 2 - Gap filling:

- cho h/s đọc đoạn văn thiếu và cho biết mỗi trỗ đó điền từ
loại gì , đốn đáp án

- Bật băng 2 lần
Gọi h/s nêu đáp án

Bật băng từng câu để chữa bài cùng cả lớp
1. photography

2. 19

3. Exhibition 
4.50

5. Beauty
6.Simple 
7. peaceful
8. chickens
9. stimulated
10. Escape

Đọc đoạn văn thiếu và
xxác định mỗi chỗ đó điền
từ loại gì , đốn đáp án
Nghe và điền từ

Nêu ỏp ỏn

Chữa bài cùng cả lớp
4. After you listen:

-yêu cầu h/s kể lại về câu lạc nhiếp ảnh Vầng Trăng
Khuyết

Cung cấp các câu hỏi gợi ý .
+ What is the name of the club?
+ Who are the members of the club?
+ Where do they come from?

+How many are there?

+How many photographs ...? 
Gọi đại diện nhóm trình bầy trớc lớp

Hoạt đơng theo nhóm
kể lại về câu lạc nhiếp ảnh
Vầng Trăng Khuyết qua
cỏc cõu hi gi ý .

trình bầy trớc lớp

4.Cñng cè

Tổng kết lại nội dung chính trong bài Summarize the main points.
 5. Dặn dò :

Häc tõ míi và chuẩn bị bài mới : Writing

</div>
(44)<div class='page_container' data-page=44>

Ngày soạn: 10/10/2010

Unit 4: Special education

Period 23

Writing

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s hiểu đợc cấu trúc cơ bản của một bức th phàn nàn .
Cuối bài viết h/s có thể viết một bức th phàn nàn

Ph¸t triĨn c¸c kü năng viêt th

II. THIT B GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn , băng đài
 III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

kiểm tra từ mới trong bài nói, thực hiện đoạn hội thoại hỏi đáp về việc học ở cấp 2
3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Task 1:

Gi¶I thÝch mét sè tõ míi cho h/s
+Native (a) ban ngu

+ air-conditioned (a) Dc trang bi dieu hoa .
+ advertisement.( quang cao )

+ Complain about sth .
+ quality (n) chat luong 
+ service (n)

+ resolve ( giai quyet )

+ Require sbd to do sth ( doi hoi ai lam gi ) 
+ Give sbd a refund ( hoan lai tien cho ai ) 
+ enclose(v) gui kem

+ receipt(n) bien lai , bien nhan

Cho h/s đọc các thông tin trong quảng cáo và thảo luận
Yêu cầu h/s hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại

Gọi h/s đọc đoạn họi thoại vừa hoàn thành
Chữa lỗi

1. I'm definitely not happy with it at all.

2. There are only few native teachers, not all of them are 
native ones.

3. In fact there are more than 30 Ss in my class.
4. I have to pay for them .

5. The room is not air- conditioned . There is only one 
ceiling fan in my classroom. It is very hot.

6. In fact classes often start late and finish early. Sometimes 
it starts 20 minutes late.

Chep và đọc từ mới

đọc các thông tin trong

quảng cáo và thảo luận theo
bn

hoàn thành đoạn hội thoại
theo bàn

c đoạn họi thoại vừa hoàn
thành theo cặp

2. Task 2:

- yêu cầu h/s dựa vào đoạn hội thoại để hoàn thành bức th
phàn nàn

- cung cÊp các liên từ nếu cần thiết

...First, you say that there are only native teachers, there 
are Vietnamese teachers. Second, You say that each class

Hoạt động theo bàn

</div>
(45)<div class='page_container' data-page=45>

has no more than 20 Ss but there are over 30 Ss in my class. 
Furthermore, in the advertisement, you say that we can have
books and cassette tapes free of charge but in fact we had to
pay for them. To make the mater worse, the classroom is not 
air-conditioned. That is quite different from advertisement. 
Finally, what you make us disatified best is the time. The 
class time is not the same as what the advertisement says. 
Classes not only start late but also finish early...

thµnh bøc th

Viết lên bảng
4. Củng cố

Nói lại cách viêt một lá th phàn nàn và nội dung của lá th
5. Dặn dò

Học bài và chuẩn bị bài mới

Ngày soạn : 14/10/2010

Unit 4: Special education

Period 24:

Language focus

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s phát âm đúng 2 âm / / và / / trong các từ đơn lẻ và trong các phát ngôn
Biết cách cấu tạo của cụm danh từ chỉ ngời ( the + adjective) , nói đợc thói quen
trong quá khứ với cấu trúc ( used to + infinitive), sử dụng đợc đại từ which với chức
năng

liên kết toàn bộ mệnh đề
 II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn , băng đài
 III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng

10H
10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

</div>
(46)<div class='page_container' data-page=46>

kiÓm tra tõ míi trong bµi 4
3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ss' activities 
I. Pronunciation:

* Listen and repeat

Bật băng 1 lợt để h/s phân biệt sự khác nhau về trờng độ
giữa 2 nguyên âm / /và / /

Bật băng lại cho h/s nghe và nhắc lại
Gọi h/s đọc lại

* practise these sentences

Bật băng lại cho h/s nghe và nhắc lại
Gọi h/s đọc lại các câu

Nghe băng và phân biệt sự
khác nhau về trờng độ giữa
2 nguyên âm / / và / /
nghe và nhắc lại theo
băng

đọc lại các từ
II. Grammar and vocabulary :

* The + adjective

Giải thích cấu trúc ( The + adjective) dùng để chỉ một
nhóm ngời , ở dạng số nhiều.

- Ex: The rich; the poor

Exercise 1: Complete these sentences using the + 
adjective

Yªu cầu HS làm bài tập

Gi HS c ỏp ỏn, vit lên bảng

2. the injured 3.the unemployed 
 4. the sick 5. the poor

* Explain used to + infinitive
§a ra vÝ dơ:

Ex: I used to smoke a box of cigarete a day when I was a
student.( now, I don’t smoke any more.)

Yªu cầu hs xem ví dụ nêu cấu trúc và c¸ch dïng.
- S – used to – V

- S – didn’t use to – V

- Did – S – use to – V

C¸ch dïng: Dïng chØ thãi quen trong qu¸ khø
Exercise 2 :

Yêu cầu h/s dùng Used to và 1 động từ thích hợp điền
vào chỗ trống

Gọi h/s viết đáp án lên bảng cho h/s nhận xét và chữa bài
1. used to smoke 2. used to have/ ride 3. used to live 
4. used to eat 5. used to be 6. used to take 
7. used to be 8. did you see to go

* Which as a connector
§a vÝ dơ

Ex: Lan gets mark 10, which surprised us.
Yêu cầu h/s đọc và nhận xét cách dùng
GiảI thích cách dùng :

Which dùng thay thế cho cả mệnh đề đứng trớc nó , nó có
chức năng là chủ ngữ

Exercise 3 :

Yêu cầu h/s làm bài tập
Gọi h/s viết đáp án lên bảng
Cho /s nhận xét và chữa bài

2. Jill isn't on the phone, which makes it difficult to

contact her.

NhËn biÕt c¸c tõ nêu ý kiến
Làm bài tập

Nờu ỏp ỏn

c ví dụ nêu cấu trúc và
cách dùng.

Lµm bµi tËp

viết đáp án lên bảng và
nhận xét

đọc ví dụ và nhận xét cách
dùng

Lµm bµi tËp

viết đáp án lên bảng và
nhận xét

</div>
(47)<div class='page_container' data-page=47>

3. Neil has passed his examinations, which is good news.
4. Our flight was delayed, which meant we had to wait 
for hours at the airport.

5. Ann offered to put me up for night, which was very

nice of her.

6. The street I live in is very noisy at night, which makes 
it difficult to sleep.

7. Our car has broken down, which means we can't go

away tomorrow. chÐp bµi vµo vë

4: Cđng cố

Nhắc lại kiến thức trọng tâm trong bài
 5.Dặn dò

Học bài và chuẩn bị bài mới Unit 5: Technology and you_ Reading

Ngày soạn : 15/10/2010

Unit 5: Technology and you

Period 25 : Reading

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s đọc hiểu đoạn văn , cung cấp từ mới và cụm từ liên quan đến các bộ phận và
các thiết bị của hệ thống máy tính .

H/s hiểu bài và làm đợc các phần bài tập trong bài đọc
Phát triển kỹ năng đọc hiểu

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn băng đài

III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài c

Kiểm tra ngữ pháp vµ tõ míi trong bµi 4 
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities 
I. Before you read

Yêu cầu hs thảo luận theo bàn và khớp các từ vói
c¸c bé phËn trong tranh

Gióp hss hiĨu c¸c tõ nÕu cÇn

Gọi hs nêu đáp án và ccho nhận xét
1. D-visual display unit (VDU)
2. E.- mouse

3. G - Printer 
4. C- keyboard

5. A -Central processing unit (CPU)
6. F- Floppy disks

7. B- CD ROMS 
8. H - speaker

 Vocabulary:

Cung cÊp tõ míi cho hs

Miraculous (adj) wonderful, fantastic.
Calculating machine (n) : may tinh

Calculations ( add, subtract, multiply, divide )

Xem tanh ,đọc các từ trong khung
thảo luận theo bàn và khớp các từ
vói các bộ phận trong tranh

nêu đáp án và cho nhận xét

chép từ mới
Nghe và đọc lại

</div>
(48)<div class='page_container' data-page=48>

Lightning speed (n) tốc độ ánh sáng
Storage device (n) thiết bị lu giữ thơng tin

Memos = memorandums (n) sỉ ghi nhí, tin nh¾n
request for leave .(n) cho phÐp ghi

II . While you read

Bật băng cho hs nghe một lợt , yêu cầu hs đọc
thầm đoạn vn để nắm nội dung của bài đọc
* Task 1 :

Yêu cầu hs đoán nghĩa của các từ và khớp với với
các định nghĩa

Giúp hs nếu không hiểu các định nghĩa
Gọi hs nêu đáp án và chữa bài

1. a 2. e 3. a 4. b 5d
đọc các từ gọi hs đọc lại

Nghe băng và đọc bài để nắm nội
dung của bài đọc

Làm việc theo bàn thảo luận ,
 đoán nghĩa của các từ và khớp 
với với các định nghĩa

nêu đáp án và chữa bài
đọc theo gv

* Task 2:

- yêu cầu hs đọc lại bài để nắm nội dung của bài
đọc sau đó tìm nhan đề cho bài đọc

Gọi hs nêu đáp án

C. What can the computer do ?

Đọc lại bài để nắm nội dung của
bài đọc sau đó tìm nhan đề cho
bài đọc

Nêu đáp án
* Task 3 ( answering questions )

- cho hs đọc các câu hỏi và tìm thơng tin trong
bài đọc để trả lời theo gợi ý

Gọi hs viết đáp án lên bảng
Chữa bài cùng cả lớp

1. It helps us visit shops, offices, and places of 
interests, pay bills, read newspapers, receive 
letters.

2. Because it is capable of doing anything you 
ask; it can speed up the calculations allow you 
to type and print any kind of document...

Hoạt động theo bàn . đọc các câu
hỏi và tìm thơng tin trong bài đọc
để trả lời theo gợi ý

Viết đáp án lờn bng

Nhận xét câu trả lời và chép bài
4. After you read

- yêu cầu hs thảo luận để tìm ra những tính năng
khác của máy tính trong cuộc sống hàng ngày

Thảo luận theo bàn để liệt kê
những tính năng khác của máy
tính trong cuộc sống hàng ngày
đại diện nêu đáp án trớc lóp
4. Củng cố

- nói lại các tính năng của máy vi tÝnh 
 5. DỈn dß

- học từ mới và dọc lạ bài , chuẩn bị bài mới : speaking

</div>
(49)<div class='page_container' data-page=49>

Ngày soạn : 17/10/2010

Unit 5:

Technology and you

Period 26 :

Speaking

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s sử dụng từ và câu để hỏi và trả lời các cau hỏi về chức năng của các thiets bị
hiện đại nh : radio , tivi ..., có thể nói về những lợi ích của cơng nghệ thông tin trong
đời sống hàng ngày

Phát triển kỹ năng nói
 II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sách giáo khoa, giáo án
 III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

Kiểm tra ngữ pháp và từ mới trong bµi 4 
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Task 1: Ask and answer Qs
- Tr×nh bay t×nh hng cđa bµi

- Đọc câu ví dụ để hớng dẫn hs thực hiện nhiệm
vụ

Yêu cầu hs đặt câu hỏi và trả lời dựa theo gọi ý
Gọi vài cặp thực hiện hội thoại

A: could/can you tell me what the ra dio is used 
for?

-B: Well, It's used to listen to the news and learn
foreign languages.

A: Could you tell me what the TV is used for? 
B: Well, It's used to watch football matches, and 
TV game shows.

A: Could you tell me what the fax machine is 
used for?

B: Well, It's used to send and receive letter 
quickly.

A: Could you tell me what the electric cooker is 
used for?

B: Well, It's used to cook rice and keep rice warm
.

A: Could you tell me what the air conditioner is 
used for?

B: Well, It's used to keep the air cool when it 
hot.

Nhìn vào câu ví dụ và nghe gv
đọc mẫu

Hoạt động theo cặp đặt câu hỏi

và trả lời dựa theo gọi ý

thùc hiƯn héi tho¹i tríc líp

2. Task 2 : sentence completion

Yêu cầu hs thực hiện theo bàn để hoàn thành các
câu sử dụng các từ cho sẵn

Gọi hs nêu đáp án

1. Store very large amounts of information
2. transmit information qiuckly.

Hoạt đọng theo bàn để hoàn
thành các câu sử dụng các từ
cho sẵn

Đại diện nêu đáp án

</div>
(50)<div class='page_container' data-page=50>

3. process information as soon as we receive it.
4.send messages from one computer to another 
5. hold long distance meetings in which the 
participants can see each other on a screen
6.make use of central stores of information.
7. send TV programmes from other countries.
8. design houses, bridges, gardensand buildings
3. Task 3: Ordering

Yêu cầu hs xem lại các ý trong task 2 và sắp xếp

theo thứ tự quan trọng

Gợi ý hs nãi nh:

I think that the most important use of information
technology is radio Because it is used to listen to
music and learn foreign language....

Thực hiện theo bàn và xem lại
các ý trong task 2 để sắp xếp
theo thứ tự quan trọng

Dựa vào câu mẫu để trình bày ý
kiến

4. Further practice

Yêu cầu hs sử dụng thông tin ở task 1và 2 để nói

về lợi ích của công nghệ thông tin Thực hiện theo bàn và sử dụng thông tin ở task 1và 2 để nói về
lợi ích của cơng nghệ thơng tin

4. Củng cố

Nói lai về lợi ích của công nghệ thông tin
5. Dặn dò .

Học lại bài và chuẩn bị bài mới : lisening

Ngày soạn : 22/10/2009

Unit 5: Technology and you

Period 27 :

listening

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Gióp h/s nghe hiĨu vỊ t©m sù cđa mét ngêi lín ti vỊ kinh nghiƯm häc sư dơng m¸y
vi tÝnh

Làm các bài tập đúng sai , điền từ và chỗ trống

Sau bµi nghe hs có thể tóm tắt nội dung cính của bài nghe
Phát triển kỹ năng nghe hiểu

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn, băng đài
 III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

</div>
(51)<div class='page_container' data-page=51>

Nói lợi ích của công nghƯ th«ng tin trong cc sèng 
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1.Warm up : Ask and answer

Nêu câu hỏi .

- How often do you use radio?
 cell phone?
 camcorder ?
 computer?
 TV?

fax machine ?

Trả lời tự do các câu hỏi

2. Before you listen 
 Vocabulary.
To be worried about
To become worried
Shy (a) xÊu hỉ
Memory (n) bé nhí
Refuse (v) tõ chèi

Make an excuse (v) say sorry viÖn lý do
Have a headache đau đầu

S+be+adj to do sth:

I was too shy to ask him any more
It was too shy to ask him

S+be+adj+for sbd+to do sth

It is very difficult for me to learn English
- đọc mẫu cho hs nghe va yêu cầu hs nhắc lại

chép từ mới
Nghe và đọc

3. While you listen 
Lead in:

You hear an old computer director talking about
his experiences of learning how to use a computer
from his son. You listen to the tape and do task 1
and then Decide whether the statements are true
or false.

Task 1 True or false

- Cho hs đọc các câu trớc khi nghe
Bật băng cho hs nghe 2 lợt

Cho hs thảo luận để chọn đáp án
Gọi hs nêu đáp ỏn

Chữa bài cùng cả lớp
1. F ( he wasn't worried )
2. T 3.T

4. F ( He understood about computers and

became the man's teacher.)

5. F ( He didn't understand the lesson very well)
6 F ( He didn't want to learn ...)

đọc các câu trớc khi nghe
nghe băng 2 lợt

thảo luận để chọn đáp án

nêu đáp án, giảI thích cho đáp án

Task 2 gap filling.

Cho hs đọc trớc đoạn văn thiếu
Bật băng cho hs nghe 2 lợt
Gọi hs nêu đáp án

Bật băng để chữa bài cùng cả lớp

1. invited; 2.still; 3.refused; 4.excuse 
5.anything

đọc trớc đoạn văn thiếu 
nghe 2 lợt

nêu đáp án

4. After you listen Hoạt động theo nhóm để thảo

</div>
(52)<div class='page_container' data-page=52>

The story is about an old man who doesn't know 
how to use the computer . He wasn't worried 
when his son bought a computer, but he became 
worried when his secretary asked him for

computer in the office . So he decided to take 
some lessons in computing from his son. He really
didn t understand anything about computer when’
his son told him it was a VDU, so he was too shy 
to ask him any more...

- Ask Ps to ask some Qs about the story .

Nãi l¹i vỊ näi dung của doạn văn
vừa nghe

4.Củng cố

- tãm t¾t đoạn văn 
5. Dặn dò

- Häc tõ míi và chuẩn bị bài mới : Writing

Ngày soạn : 23/10/2009

Unit 5: Technology and you

Period 28 :

Writing

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp h/s nghe hiểu đợc nội dung và ngôn ngữ dùng trong viết hớng dẫn

Hiểu và viết đợc tập hợp các hớng dẫn về việc sử dụng điều khiển ti vi sử dụng
hớng dẫn dã cho

Phát triển kỹ năng viÕt
 II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sách giáo khoa, giáo án
 III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

ViÕt tõ vùng bµi nghe 
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities 
1. Task 1.

Yêu cầu hs đọc bài mẫu về sử dụng điện
thoại

2. Task 2 .

Yêu cầu hs tìm các trạng từ hay từ nối và các
hình thức mệnh lệnh trong bài mẫu

Trạng từ , từ nối : First, next , then , untill
§éng tõ ë mÖnh lÖnh : Lift , insert, press,
wait

3.Task3.

Yêu cầu hs nhìn vào điêu khiển từ xa TV và trả
lời câu hỏi

Gọi hs nêu dấp án

Cho hs nhận xét và chữa

1- If I want to operate the TV with a remote 
control, I have to make sure that the cord is

đọc bài mẫu v s dng in
thoi

tìm các trạng từ hay từ nối và các
hình thức mệnh lệnh trong bài

mẫu

Xem điêu khiển từ xa TV và
trả lời câu hỏi

</div>
(53)<div class='page_container' data-page=53>

plugged and the main is turned on.
2- I should press the power button.
3- I should press the programme button.
4- I should press number 1.2.3….4..

5- I should press the volume button up and down.
6- I should press the mute button.

4.Task 4.

Yêu cầu hs viết về cách sử dụng T V với bộ điều
khiển từ xa sử dụng hình ảnh trong bài và các câu
trả lời ở phần 3

Hớng dẫn hs viết bằng câu gợi ý trong s¸ch

Gọi hs đọc bài viết của mình và cho hs khỏc nhn
xột

Chữa lỗi trong bài viết nếu cã

If you want to operate a TV with a remote control,
you must make sure that the cord is plugged in
and the main is turned on. First, press the power
button to turn on the TV. Next, select the channel
by pressing number 1.2.3…then press the

programme button to select programme you like.
Final, press the volume button up and down to

select volume level and you want to turn off the
TV, you have to press the power button again.

Hoạt động theo bàn thảo luận và
viết về cách sử dụng T V với bộ
điều khiển từ xa sử dụng hình ảnh
trong bài và các câu trả li phn
3

bắt đầu viết bằng câu gợi ý trong
sách

c bi vit ca mình và hs
khác nhận xét

chÐp bµi vµo vë
 4. Cđng cè

Nhắc lại cách viết về cách hớng dãn sử dụng một cáI gì đó
5. Dăn dị

Häc bµi và chuẩn bị bài mới: Language focus

</div>
(54)<div class='page_container' data-page=54>

Teacher s activities’ Ps activities’
Work in pairs.

* Read instructions again
and find out the

connectors and imperative

form of verbs.

* Some Ps report their
result in front of class.
- Connectors: First, nexr, 
then, until.

- Imperative form of 
verbs: Lift, insert, press, 
wait

Work in groups.

* See the pictures to ask
and answer the questions
with your partners.

1- If I want to operate the 
TV with a remote control, 
I have to make sure that 
the cord is plugged and 
the main is turned on.
2- I should press the 
power button.

3- I should press the 
programme button.

4- I should press number 
1.2.3….4..

5- I should press the 
volume button up and 
down.

6- I should press the mute
button.

Work individually

* Use information above
to write a set of

instructions on how to
operate the TV with a
remote control.

</div>
(55)<div class='page_container' data-page=55>

* Writing:

If you want to operate a 
TV with a remote control, 
you must make sure that 
the cord is plugged in and
the main is turned on. 
First, press the power 
button to turn on the TV. 
Next, select the channel 
by pressing number

1.2.3…then press the

programme button to 
select programme you 
like. Final, press the 
volume button up and 
down to select volume 
level and you want to turn
off the TV, you have to 
press the power button 
again.

4/ consolidation:
revise all the lesson
5/ Homework:

Write a set of instructions on how to use a public telephone.

</div>
(56)<div class='page_container' data-page=56>

Ngày soạn : 24/10/2010

Unit 5: Technology and you

Period 29 :

Language focus

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp hs phân biệt 2 âm /u/ và /u:/ sử dụng thì hiện tại hồn thành trong câu chủ động
và câu bị động , i t quan h Which, Who, That

Làm các bài tËp liªn quan

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn, băng đài
 III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

ViÕt tõ míi trong bµi 5 
 3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

I. Pronunciation:

* bật băng cho hs nghe và nhận xé sự khác
nhau giữa 2 âm /u/-/u:/

Bật băng cho hs nghe và đọc lại theo băng
Gọi hs đọc lại các từ và câu vừa nghe
Tìm các từ có 2 âm /u/-/u:/.

nghe và nhận xé sự khác nhau giữa 2
âm /u/-/u:/

và đọc lại theo băng

đọc lại các từ và câu vừa nghe
Tìm các từ có 2 âm /u/-/u:/.
3. Grammar and vocabulary

a. The present perfect tense:

®a vÝ dụ yêu cầu hs nêu lại về cấu trúc và c¸ch
dïng

1. I have learnt E for 3 years/ since 2005
2 . I have ever come here.

3. She has broken her leg, now she can t play ’
sports.

4. She has just told me this story.
Exercise 1:

yêu cầu hs làm bài tập

gọi hs chữa bài

nhận xét bài lam và chữa chung
1. Tan has opened the door .
2. He has turned on the TV .
3. He has tidies the house.
4. He has cleaned the floor.
5. He has turned on the lights.

6. He has laid two bottles of water on the 
table.

* form: S+have/has + PP + O
* Useges:

- Express an action begining in the
past, still relate to the present.

- Express an action happening in the
past but not difinite clearly the time.
- Express an action happening in the
past, its result relate to the present.
- Express an action has just happened (
use adv: just)

b. Present perfect passive:

đa ví dụ yêu cầu hs nêu lại về cấu trúc và cách
dùng

Act: They have cleaned the room.

Passive: The room has been cleaned (by them)
* Exercises 2 :

yêu cầu hs làm bài tập

gọi hs chữa bài

nhận xét bài lam và chữa chung

* Form S + have/has + been + PP + O

</div>
(57)<div class='page_container' data-page=57>

1 . A new hospital for children has been built 
in our city.

2. Another man - made satellite has been sent 
up into space.

3. More and more trees have been cut down 
for woods by farmers.

4. thousands of animals have been killed in the
forest fire.

5. about one hundred buildings and houses 
have been destroyed in the earthquake. 
c. Relative pronoun : which , that , who . 
* Review the uses of who , which, that

- The man who/ that is standing over there is 
my brother

- The book that/ which I bought yesterday is 
very interesting

* Exercise 3:

 yêu cầu hs làm bài tập

gọi hs chữa bài

nhận xét bài lam và chữa chung
1. which 2. which 3.which 4 who , 5. 
who

6. who., 7. who(m), 8. which 9. which 10. 
who

Who/ that replace a noun of person,
can be Subject or Object in the relative
clause.

That/ Which replace a noun of thing, 
can be Subject or Object in the relative
clause.

4. Cñng cè

Nhắc lại kiến thức trọng tâm 
5.Dặn dß

Học bài , làm lại bài tập và chuẩn bị bài mới

Ngày soạn ; 29/10/2010

Unit 6 : an excursion

Period 30: Reading

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp hs đọc lá th nói về 1 chuyến đI , nắm đợc các từ mới liên quan đến chuyến đI
chơI và các thắng cảnh

Học sinh hiểu bài và làm đợc các bài tập liên quan
Phát triển kỹ năng đọc hiểu

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn, băng đài
 III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

ViÕt tõ míi trong bµi 5

Viết câu sử dụng câu bị động thì hiện tại hồn thành , đại từ liên hệ which,who,
who

</div>
(58)<div class='page_container' data-page=58>

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

I. Warm up 
Networks :

- Cho hs nêu một số địa điểm nổi tiếng ở
Việt Nam .

Nói một số địa điểm nổi tiếng ở
Việt Nam .

: Thien Mu pagoda, Ha Long Bay,
One pillar pagoda, Hung temple,
II. Before you read

Cung cÊp mét sè tõ míi :
Shape of lotus : h×nh hoa sen

Picturesque site : cảnh đẹp nh tranh
Pine forest: rừng thơng

Waterfall : th¸c níc

* Yêu cầu hs nối với các bức tranh
1.D 2. B 3. A 4 C

chép bài đọc từ mới

nêu đáp án

III. While you read

1. Task 1 : multiple choice .

Cho hs đọc bài đọc để nắm nọi dung
của bức th

Yêu cầu hs đọc các câu và tìm thơng tin
cho các câu đó trong bài sau đó thảo luận
theo bàm để chọn đáp án

Gọi hs nêu đáp án

Cho hs nhận xét và chữa bài
1C 2. D 3. A

Work individually

- compare their answer with a
friend.

Đọc bài đọc để nắm nội dung của
bức th

Đọc các câu và tìm thơng tin cho
các câu đó trong bài sau đó thảo
luận theo bàn để chọn đáp án

Nêu đáp án và đa ra lí do
.

Task 2 : Answering Qs

Cho hs đọc các câu hỏi và tìm thơng tin
trong bài đọc sau đó thảo luận để trả lời
Thực hành theo cp hi tr li

Goị hs viết câu trả lời lên bảng

1. They are going on a trip when they 
have some days- off after the 1st term.

2. Because they want to understand their
geography lesson better and many of 
them have never been inside a cave.
3. It is only over 20 km.

4. They are going to make a two day trip 
and a night campfire. They are bring 
their own food and share buses with 
some other classes to make the trip 
cheap.

5. Lan is anxious about her parent's 
permission . They may not want to let 
her stay the night away from home.

Thực hiện theo nhóm đọc các câu

hỏi và tìm thơng tin trong bài đọc
sau đó thảo luận để trả li

Thực hành theo cặp hỏi trả lời
Viết câu trả lời lên bảng

Nhận xét và chữa bài

chộp ỏp ỏn vo v
4. After you read

Cho hs làm bài
Gọi hs nêu đáp án

</div>
(59)<div class='page_container' data-page=59>

Cho c¸c hs kh¸c nhËn xÕt và chữa bài
1. is going to go on

2. some caves
3. want to see
4. have learnt
5. their trip
6. only problem
7. to persaure them

8. her classmates Chép đáp án vào vở

4. Củng cố 
đọc lại từ mới
5.Dặn dò

Học từ mới , đọc lại đoạn văn , chuẩn bị bài mới :speaking
Ngày soạn :30/10/2010

Unit 6 : An Excursion

Period 31 : Speaking
I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp hs phát biểu đợc ý kiến của mình ,tranh luận để bảo vệ ý kiến về cách bố trí chỗ
ngồi theo nguyện vộng cá nhân trong một chuyến đI

Phát triển kỹ năng nói
 II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
Sách giáo khoa, giáo án,
 III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

ViÕt tõ míi trong bµi 6

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities
1. Task 1

* Cung cÊp tõ míi

-participant: ngêi cùng tham dự
-Sundeck (n) boong tàu

-Get sunburnt (v) cháy/sám nắng
-Travel sickness (n) say tµu , xe 
-Plenty of sth: nhiỊu

-Air-conditioned>< non air-conditioned. 
đợc/ ko đợc trang bị điều hoà

-Refreshments(n) phịng ăn uống trên tàu 
-Occupied (a) đã có ngời s dng

* nêu tình huống :

Tims class is going on a boat trip, read the
information about some of the participants.
Yêu cầu hs đọc các mông muốn và sở thích
của từng thành viên

chép từ mới và đọc

đọc các câu giới thiệu

</div>
(60)<div class='page_container' data-page=60>

2. Task 2

Yêu cầu hs liệt kê các ghế có các đặc điểm

phù hợp với từng ngời

* đa các mẫu câu để bầy tỏ ý kiến :
I don't think so.

To be suitable for ...
What do you think ?
What 's your idea ?

Yeeu cÇu hs thực hiện các đoạn hội thoại
theo ví dụ

A: I think seat37 is most suitable for Mary.
B: why ?

A: because she suffers from travel sickness 
so she can get lots of fresh air from that 
seat.

C: Yes. Put her in seat37 . What about 
John ?

B: put him in seat 45.

A: I don't think so. John doesn't like 
air-conditioning so put him in seat 10. He can 
take as many photographs as he likes.
D: OK. And I think Susan had better take 
the seat10 . What do you think, C ?

C: No. Susan wants to sit near Mary, I think
she should sit in seat36.

B: Ok. Put her in seat 36.

Work in groups

* List the suitable seats for each
person

1- Seats which aren t in the ’
sundeck but can help see all the 
students: 46,43,41,45,34. (Mrs 
Andrew)

2- Seats which have plenty of 
fresh air: 31,37,19,20,26,32. 
(Mary)

3- Seats which aren t air-’
conditioned but be suitable for 
taking photograghs: 10,11,12 
(John)

4- Seats which are in the sundeck:
1,5 (Tim)

5- Seats which can help a good 
view and safe: 16,29,34 (sam)

4. Cñng cè

Nhắc lại cách trình bày ý kiến
5. Dặn dò

Học bài và chuẩn bị bài mới: listening

Ngày soạn : 30/10/2010

Unit 6 : An Excursion

Period 32:

listening

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

</div>
(61)<div class='page_container' data-page=61>

Giúp hs nghe về một chuyến pic nic ,nắm đợc cac từ liên quan và nội dung của bài
nghe để làm các nhiệm vụ liên quan

Phát triển kỹ năng nghe
 II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn, băng đài
 III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

ViÕt tõ míi trong bµi speaking

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

I . Warm up: 
 Đa các câu hỏi

- what do you often do when you have
some day off ?

- Do you like go for a picnic ?
- Why do you go for a picnic?

- What do people often do at picnics ?

Trả lời các câu hỏi

II . before you read 
1. listen and repeat
Cung cÊp tõ míi

* Vocabulary Pre - teach.
-Glorious (a) đẹp trời/rực rỡ
-Destination (n) điểm đến

-Left- over ( n ) thức ăn còn thừa
-Delicious (a) tasty ngon miệng

-Botanic Garden (n) vờn bách thảo
-Spacious (a) réng r·i

-Sleep soundly (v) ngñ say

Nghe và đọc

III - While you listen 
1. Task 1

Present : You are going to listen to a short
talk by a student about her picnic with 
classmates. You listen to the tape and do the
task followed.

Yêu cầu hs xem tranh và trả lời câu hỏi
1. what can you see in this picture ?
2. where are they ?

3. what are they doing ?
Bật băng cho hs nghe

Cho hs thảo luận chọn đáp án
Gọi hs nêu đáp án và giảI thích
Bật băng lại và chữa cùng cả lớp
1. a 2. e 3.b 4.c 5. f 6.d

Xem các bức tranh và trả lời
câu hỏi

Nghe băng

tho lun chn ỏp án
nêu đáp án và giảI thích

2. Task 2 : Gap- filling .
GiảI thích yêu cầu của bài tập
Yêu cầu hs đọc các cau thiếu
Bật băng cho hs nghe

đọc yêu cầu của bài tập
đọc các câu thiếu

</div>
(62)<div class='page_container' data-page=62>

Gọi hs nêu đáp án
Bật băng lại để chữa bài

1. was just a few 
2. to pay a visit 
3. at the school gate 
4. a short tour

5. playing some more

nêu đáp án

3. Task 3 Answering Qs

Cho hs đọc các câu hỏi , gạch chân
keywords.giảI thích câu hỏi nếu cần
Bật băng cho hs nghe

Gọi hs nờu ỏp ỏn

Cho hs nhận xét và chữa cùng c¶ líp
1. The weather was very nice.
2. Yes it was

3. The garden was beautiful.

4. They slept soundly because it was so 
peaceful and quiet in the garden.
5. They took pictures, play games,

talked, sang and danced.

đọc các câu hỏi , gạch chân
keywords.

nghe và ghi các thơng tin
nghe đợc

thảo luận theo nhóm để trả lời
các câu hỏi

nêu đáp án

4. After you listen

Yêu câu hs nói về kế hoạch dựa vào các gọi
ý sau.

How to get there ?

What kind of food to bring?
What to do there?

Hoạt động theo nhóm để trả
lời câu hỏi

đại diện nêu câu trả lời

4. Cñng cè

đọc lại từ mới 
 5. Dặn dò

Häc bµi vµ chuẩn bị bài mới : Writing

</div>
(63)<div class='page_container' data-page=63>

Ngày soạn ; 31/10/2010

Unit 6 : An Excursion

Period 33: Writing

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp hs hiểu đợc các viết một lá th nhận một lòi đề nghị

Hs viết đợc một lá th nhận một lòi đề nghị dựa vào những từ gợi ý cho trớc
Phát triển kỹ năng viết

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn, băng đài
 III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

ViÕt tõ míi trong nghe

3. Bài mới

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Task 1 :

Yêu cầu hs đọc bài tập và tìm từ mới
Giải thích các từ hs yêu cầu

to pick sbd up: đón ai

to be convenient for : thuận lợi cho

cho hs thảo luận về những yêu cầu trong
th của Nga và những chi tiết đợc nêu
trong th của Hoa

gäi hs nêu kết quả thảo luận

Request: Can you go shopping with me 
to buy the things we need for the trip. 
Confirmation: Certainly, I will help you
to prepare everything you need for the 
trip.

Đọc bài tập và tìm từ míi

Thảo luận về những yêu cầu trong
th của Nga và những chi tiết đợc nêu
trong th của Hoa

2. Task 2: writing confirmation. 
Yêu cầu hs đọc bài tập và tìm từ mới
Giải thích các từ hs u cầu

Yêu cầu hs thực hiện bài tập

Cho hs hoạt động theo nhóm để thảo
luận và nhận xét về bài viết

Gọi hs đọc bài viết của nhóm

Gọi 1 hs viết bài của nhóm lên bảng

Chữa lỗi cùng cả lớp

Dear Lan,

Firstly, let me congratulate you on your 
15th birthday. Certainly, I will help you to

prepare everything you need for the 
party. I will go to the nearby market and 
get them on Saturday morning. Luckily, 
Saturday is weekend so I have the whole 
day free.

Đọc bài tập và tìm từ mới
ViÕt th tr¶ lêi

Hoạt động theo nhóm để thảo luận
và nhận xét về bài viết

Đọc bài viết của nhóm

Đại diện viết bài của nhóm lên
bảng

</div>
(64)<div class='page_container' data-page=64>

I will be at your house at 6.30 Pm on 
Saturday.

Love,

Dear Minh,

I'm happy to tell you that the book you 
want to borrow is available. You can use
this for the next two weeks. However, I 
will not be at home this Saturday. Can 
you come on Sunday? I will be waiting 
for you all day.

See you then.,

Yours, Ch÷a bµi viÕt vµ chÐp bµi

4. Cđng cè

Nêu lại nội dung của một bức th chấp nhận hoặc yêu cầu.
5. Dặn dò

c li bài viết và chuẩn bị bài mới : Language focus

Ngày soạn :5/11/2010

Unit 6 : an excursion

Period 34 :

language focus

I.MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Giúp hs hiểu đợc

- cách phát âm của 2 ©m / ¶ / & / 3: /

- cách sử dụng thì hiện tại tiếp diễn mang nghĩa tơng lai , thì
t¬ng lai víi be going to

Phát triển kỹ năng viết và nãi
 II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY

Sỏch giỏo khoa, giỏo ỏn, băng đài
 III. TIẾN TRèNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I
 2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

ViÕt tõ míi trong bµi 6
3. Bài mới

</div>
(65)<div class='page_container' data-page=65>

Teacher's activities Ss' activities
I. Pronunciation :

1. Listen and repeat

Bạt băng cho hs nghe và nhận xét sự khác nhau giữa 2
âm / ả / & / 3: /

Hớng dẫn cách phát âm 2 âm này
Bật băng cho hs nghe và đọc theo
Gọi hs đọc các từ

Bật băng cho hs nghe đọc cỏc cõu

Cho hs gạch chân các từ có chứa 2 âm này
Gội hs nêu dáp án

II. Grammar:

The present progressive (with future meaning) and be
going to .

1. The present progressive (with future meaning)
Cho ví dụ và yêu cầu hs nêu cấu trúc và cách dùng
I'm doing my homework this afternoon.

Form:

S + be + ving.

Use : the present progressive ( with future meaning)
arrangement between people. It's common with verbs
such as go, come, see, visit, meet, have(a party),
leave..with accuracy time and place.

2. be going to

Cho ví dụ và yêu cầu hs nêu cấu trúc và cách dùng
Looking up at the black clouds in the sky. I think it is
going to rain.

Form: be going to + vinf.

Ues : - express predictions especially the real or
strong evidence in the present situation

Eg1.exercise 1
Yêu cầu hs làm bài tập

Gọi hs viết dáp án lên bảng và chữa bài cïng c¶ líp
1.Are you doing ; 2. is getting married 3. are you 
going to 4. am going to be . 5. is going to

2. Exercise 2.

Yêu cầu hs làm bài tập

Gọi hs viết dáp án lên bảng và chữa bài cùng c¶ líp
1. are going 2. are having 3. is going to catch , 
4. are you putting , is not going to give

3.Exercise 3.

Yêu cầu hs lµm bµi tËp

Gäi hs viÕt dáp án lên bảng và chữa bài cùng cả lớp
1. are you going to see it ?

I'm doing my homework .

2. we are visiting our grandparents.

3. What's he going to do with it? He is going to 
buy a new motorbike.

4. It's going to rain soon.
I'm going to clean them later

5. are you going to see it ?
I'm doing my homework .

6. we are visiting our grandparents.

nghe vµ nhận xét sự khác nhau
giữa 2 âm / ả / & / 3: /

nghe và đọc theo băng
đọc các từ

nghe đọc các câu và gạch
chân các từ có chứa 2 âm này
nêu dáp án

§äc vÝ dơ ,nêu cấu trúc và cách
dùng

chép bài và lấy ví dụ

Đọc ví dụ ,nêu cấu trúc và cách
dùng

chép bài và lÊy vÝ dơ
lµm bµi tËp

viÕt dáp án lên bảng và chữa
bài

làm bài tập

viết dáp án lên bảng và chữa
bài

làm bài tập

viết dáp án lên bảng và chữa
bài

</div>
(66)<div class='page_container' data-page=66>

7. What's he going to do with it? He is going to 
buy a new motorbike.

8. It's going to rain soon.
I'm going to clean them later.

4. cñng cè

Nhắc lại các nội dung chính trong bài
5. DỈn dß

Học bài và làm lại bài tập , làm bµi Test yourself

Nov 16th, 2008.

Period 35 : Test yourself B 
I. Aims and objectives :

* Help Ps to check their knowledge themselves that they learnt from unit 4 - unit 7.
* Help Ps to review : pronunciation, grammar, and vocabulary

* By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to do some exercises by themselves. And know
the form of the tests .

II. teaching aids :

Textbook, cassette and tape
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 1') Checking attendance 
Date of

teaching

Class Ps’s attendance Absentees

10A
10D

2.Previous lesson check 
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

I.Listening:( 9 ' )
Play the tape

* Ask Ps to listen and fill in the banks .
* Check and give correct answers

Reading Oxford 
Location 50 miles to

the west of 
London

In central 
England 
Populatio

n 120,000 people 90,000 people 
Noted for - market

town 
- Biscuit 
factory 
- computer 
industry

-

university
- car 
factory

- Cowley 
road

- Listen and do the test individually.

- Check their answers

II. Reading (10 )’

Ask Ps to do then test individually
Check and give correct answers.

Do the test individually.

</div>
(67)<div class='page_container' data-page=67>

1. F ( teachers give too much home 
work.)

2. F ( They say that it is unnecessary for 
children to do work at home in their free
time )

3. T

4. F ( Ss have to repeat tasks which they 
have already done at school) 5.T

Check their answers

III. Grammar (8 ) ’

Ask Ps to do exercises individually
Check and give correct answers.

1. by scientists 
2. for other people 
3. there is

4. which attempts
5. the various 
6. the programme 
7. a/ per year

8. by private inventors 
9. it is important 
10.be wanted

Do the test

Check theirs answers

IV. Writing (10minutes)
* Ask Ps to do exercises

- Check and give correct answers
Our class has just learned about new 
inventions and my teacher has an idea of
visiting your factory. I think you are 
willing to help us.

Our class is planning to visit your 
factory at about 7:30 a.m., next

Thursday july 20th. forty Ss in my class

are going to there by bus. My teacher 
has had intention of asking you to show 
the students the process of fifing

computers.

Would you be so kind as to let us stay at 
your factory the whole morning and 
recommended someone to give us a tour 
a round the workshops where the

workers fix the computer? And can you 
let us meet and talk with the workers? 
I hope you will provide us favourable 
conditions to have an interesting and 
useful visit. Will you let me know your 
reply next Monday, If you don't mind? 
 Thank you a lot

Your sincerely,
 Long

Do the test

Read the letter

Check their answers

4. consolidation ( 5')

Review all knowledge from unit 4 to unit 6
5.Homework ( 2') do exercises again

</div>
(68)<div class='page_container' data-page=68></div>
(69)<div class='page_container' data-page=69>

Ngày soạn :6/11/2010

Period 36 : Written Test 2

I. MỤC ĐÍCH YÊU CẦU

Phát hiện ra những mặt mạnh và mặt yếu của hs để có kế hoạch bồi dững thêm
đánh giá nhận thức của hs qua 3 bài 4,5,6

II. THIẾT BỊ GIẢNG DẠY 
đề kiểm tra

III. TIẾN TRÌNH BÀI GIẢNG
 1. Tổ chức lớp

Ngày dạy Lớp Sĩ số h/s vắng
10H

10I

2. Kiểm tra bài cũ

Kh«ng 
3. Bài mới

I. Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronunced differently from that of the 
other words.

1/ a job b top c box d today

2/ a book b look c shoot d cook

3/ a land b tall c fall d water

4/ a june b full c but d put

5/ a together b term c worker d other

II/ Read carefully and then choose A,B,C,or d to complete the letter.

I am writing to complain (6)...the car that I (7)...from you yesterday. It is just a
heap (8)...scrap, when I (9)...to start it this morning the key wouldn't turn in the
lock, the bettery was flat and two of plugs needed (10)...then when I finally got it going,
the bonnet wouldn't stay closed and the driver's side door fell (11)...and when I try to
stop to (12)...up the door, the brakes didn't (13)..., so I crash into the tree and the
mashed the radiator. Also one of the wheel came off. Do you really think this car is

(14)...$150?. Well, if you do, I don't. What are you going (15)...about it?
Yours faithfully,

Mr Brown

6/ a of b on c at d about

7/ a buy b bought c had bought d have bought

8/ a give b pick c get d come

9/ a to do b does c do d did

10/ a changing b. to change c change d changed

11/ a off b of c away d on

12/ a give b pick c . get d come

13/ a to do b does c do d did

14/ a cost b valuable c sold d worth

15/ a on b in c of d for

III/ Read carefully and fill in the numbered gap with a suitable word to complete the 
passage.Using the words given below.

booked beach take flight .guidebook

Last year I decided to go on a (16)...holiday. I wanted to lie in the sun and swim in the
sea for a change. I went on my own, so I call a hotel and (17)... a single room. my

</div>
(70)<div class='page_container' data-page=70>

checking in, I bought myself a (19)... so that I could read about the area I was going to.
I put it in my hand luggage so that I could look at it on the plane. Actualy, I finished reading
it before (20)... off - We had to wait two hours before we could leave because the pilot
was ill.

IV/ Choose the correct answer by circling A,B,C or D.
21/ I...repair my bike next Sunday.

a am going b am going to c will d would

22/ This is the device...is used to operate TV.

a when b what c which d who

23/ I am bored...watching the same programme on TV.

a in b with c for d of

24/ When will you go...a trip?

a in b on c for d at

25/ She...the piano since she was 10.

a plays b played c has played d is playing

26/ The man...I spoke to yesterday is my friend.

a which b who c that d whom

27/ My mother...here for HaNoi tomorrow.

a leaves b will leave c is leaving d left

28/ My father used to...a lot, but now he's given it up.

a be smoked b be smoking c smoke d smoking

29/ I have learnt English...three years.

a with b since c for d about

30/ A nurse is a person...looks after patients.

a which b who c whom d that

31/ Turn...the TV. Don't you know that the children are working?.

a on b out c down d up

32/ Da Lat is a place...is famous for pine forests and waterfall.

a where b that c who d which

33/ Could you tell me what this device used...?

a with b to c for d on

34/ They...more money by the management.

a offer b have offered c offered d have been offered

35/ Tom rode his bike to work for many years, bur now he take the bus. Tom...bike to
work.

a is used to riding b used for riding c used to ride d is used to ride
36/ It's important...learn English today.

a to b about c with d for

37/ Susan isn't capable...doing the job as a secretary.

a on b in c at d of

38/ He gave...smoking 3 years ago.

a to b in c for d up

39/ A school is going to...in his twon.

a builds b built c be built d build

40/ A new school is going to built for...

a thedump b the blind c the disabled d the deaf

4. Dặn dò

Chuẩn bị bài mới: Unit 7 - Reading

</div>
(71)<div class='page_container' data-page=71></div>
(72)<div class='page_container' data-page=72>

Nov,19nd, 2007

Period 40 Test correction 
I. Aims and objectives :

*Check Ps' knowledge that they learnt from unit 4 - unit 6.
* Help Ps to correct the test and give some main points .

* By the end of the test, Ps will be able to consolidate their knowledge.
II. Teaching aids :

Paper tests
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 1') Checking attendance 
Date of teaching Class Ps'

attendance Absentees

10A
10D

2.Previous lesson check :(3'')
Give paper tests to Ps
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

Warm up (4 )’

1- Is the test difficult or easy ?

2- What sentences do you feel the most
difficult?

Answer the Qs

Test Correction

I. Pick out the word whose underlined 
part is pronunced differently from that of 
the other words.

* Ask Ps to redo the part I. 
* Explain grammar

* Give the correct keys

-Redo exercises
-Check their answers

-Notice the structure and vocabulary.
II/ Read carefully and then choose

A,B,C,or d to complete the letter.
* Ask Ps to redo the part II.
* Explain grammar

* Give the correct keys

-Redo exercises
-Check their answers

-Notice the structure and vocabulary.
III/ Read carefully and fill in the

numbered gap with a suitable word to 
complete the passage.Using the words 
given below.

* Ask Ps to redo the part III.
* Explain grammar

* Give the correct keys

-Redo exercises
-Check their answers

-Notice the structure and vocabulary
IV/ Choose the correct answer by circling

A,B,C or D.

* Ask Ps to redo the part IV.
* Explain grammar

* Give the correct keys

-Redo exercises
-Check their answers

-Notice the structure and vocabulary
4. consolidation ( 5') Review all knowledge and make some sentences .
5. Home work ( 2') Preparing the next period ( unit 7 - reading )

Nov 16th, 2008

</div>
(73)<div class='page_container' data-page=73>

Unit 7- the mass media

Period 37 : Lesson 1 - Reading
I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to read TV programme schedules

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be updated with names of some popular TV

programmes such as Quiz Show, Portrait of life... and able to talk about their favorite
programmes.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, TV schedules extracted from newspapers
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 1') Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of teaching Class Ps'

attendance Absentees

10A
10D

2.Previous lesson check :(3')
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

I. Warm up (5 )’
Give networks radio

Activity 2:
* Ask.

1- Have you ever seen Cartoon ?
2- Which cartoon have you seen ?
3- Do you like them ?

4- Which cartoon do you like best?
* Lead into new lesson.

Work in groups

- Go to board and fill in the networks.
Film, radio, internet, magazine, 
newspaper, television, computer , 
periodicals...

Answer Qs

II. Before you read(8 )’

Gives handout and ask Ps to practice asking and
answering Qs

Handout:

1.How often do you watch TV?
2.When do you often watch TV?

3. How many channels are there on our national 
TV?

4. What channel do you like best? 
5. What programme do you like best?

6. How many hours a day do you watch TV? 
* Check and give suggested answers:

- Read and give some new words:
TV Series: Phim TH dµi tËp
Folk songs : bài hát dân ca
News headlines: điểm tin chính 
Quiz Show: trò chơi tuyền hình 
Portrait of life: chân dung cuộc sống
Drama : vở kịch

Comedy: phim hài kịch

Work in pairs

- Do the task in pairs
- Answer the Qs

- Read the reading after teacher.

- Read the new words after teacher
- Copy in their books

III. While you read (5 )’
1. Task 1: matching

* Ask Ps to read three TV programme schedules

Work individually

1. Read and match the words in A with
their definitions in B.

Mass

</div>
(74)<div class='page_container' data-page=74>

and do the task 1

* Ask Ps to read the title and say in Vietnamese.
* Ask Ps to discuss their answers with a friend.
* Check and corect mistakes

2. Task 2: True or false (7 )’

Tell Ps to read the programmes carefully and
decide whether the statements are true or false
and then correct the false information.

- Check and give correct answers
1.T 2.T

3.F ( The nature of language is the documentary
programme at 15:15 on VTV3.)

4.T 5.F (VTV1 starts at 5.35' and the last 
programme starts at 23.30').

3. Task 3 : answering Qs(7 )’

* Ask Ps to work in pairs and ask and answer the
Qs in the book basing on the information in the
reading passage.

- Feedback and give correct answers
1.There are five film on

2. At 9:a.m, 12:00 at noon, 7:00 p.m., 11 p.m , on
VTV1 and 7:00 p.m 0n VTV3.

3. VTV2

4. the Quiz Show

5.You should watch VTV1 
6. The football

A B

1- cartoon

c-2- drama

a-3- comedy

d-4- documentary
b-- Check their answers

2. Read the reading carefully and do the
task individually.

- Explain their answers by giving evidence
in the reading passage.

* Read 3 TV programmes again and then
give the true or false statements .

True false

1 T

2 T

3 F

4 T

5 F

3. Do the task in pairs

- Some pairs ask and answer the Qs in
front of the class.

-Check their answers

IV. After you read (6 )’

* Ask Ps to answer the Question:

- What progamme do you like best ? explain
why ?

Example: I/We like ... best
because ...

Feedback and give suggested answers

Work in groups

- Disscus and design programme

- Give the programme that they like best

and explain the reason.

- Other check their answers
 4. Consolidation ( 2')

Give names of some popular programmes on VTV: 
- rush hour: gìơ cao điểm

- sing to learn : học qua bài h¸t
- wheel of fortune chiÕc nãn kú diƯu

- who wants to be millionaire? Ai là triệu phú
- Choose the right price : giá đúng

- one versus/'və:səs/(vs) one hundred : đấu trờng 100
- who is who? Ai là ai

- Ring golden bell : dung chuông vàng
5. Homework:( 1')

- Write about TV programme you like watching best

Nov 19th, 2008

Unit 7- the mass media

Period 38 Lesson 2- Speaking 
I. Aims and objectives :

</div>
(75)<div class='page_container' data-page=75>

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be talk about the differences and similarities of some

popular types of the mass media.

II. teaching aids :

- Textbook, newspapers , radio, internet, handout
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 1')Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of checking Class Ps’

attendence Absentees

10A
10D

2.Previous lesson check :(3')

Say about the TV programme you like watching best and give reason.
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

Warm up

* Propose pupils close the book
* Provide a numbered plan (1,2,3,4)

* Read information:

1- We only receive through ears but we can

not see it.

2- We can watch programmes in many
chanels.

3- We can find information quickly and can
chat with friends and send email to

acquaintances ( ngêi quen/ th©n).
4- It contains information and pictures
without movement , it is published every
day/week/month.

* Ask what the key word in the plan is.
* Lead into new lesson.

* Close the book
* See the plan before

* Listen and find out information to
fill in the numbered plan

* Give the key word for net
THE MASS MEDIA

Task 1

* Request pupils to close the book.
* Provide a plan

* Read :

1- dictionaries
2- television
3- films
4- books
5- magazines
6- radio

7- newspapers
8- plays

9- the Internet

* Check and give correct answers

* Listen and write words belongs to
the mass media or non-mass media

non

mass media the mass media
dictionaries television

films radio

books newspapers

magazines the Internet
plays

* Open the book to check True or
False

Task 2

* Explain new words * Read information below before* Read new words

1 2

3 4

What is
it ?

1
Radio

2
TV

4
Newspape
r

3
Intern
et

</div>
(76)<div class='page_container' data-page=76>

- orally (bằng miệng)
- aurally (bằng tai)
- visually (băng mắt)
- through ears/eyes/mouth 
(qua tai/m¾t/måm)

- to deliver (Phân phát/ đọc)
- to feature (mô tả nét nổi bật)
- feature ( nét đặc trng/nổi bật)
- cue ( gợi y)

* provide a two column - table A,B
* Guide pupils practise speaking
Example:

- The mass media provides information and
entertainment, we receive them through our
ears, eyes and mouth.

- Radio provides information and
entertainment orally, we receive them
through our ears.

- Newspapers present information and
entertainment visually, we receive them
through our eyes.

- Television presents information and
entertainment orally and visually, we get
them through our ears and eyes.

* Write common features of the
types of the mass media in B

A B

The mass

media - Provide/deliver information and
entertainment

The radio - Provide information
and entertainment
orally ( through
mounth)

- Receive

information aurally
(through ears)

Newspapers - Present information
and entertainment
visually (through
eyes)

- Receive

information visually
(through eyes)

Television - present information
and entertainment
orally (through
mounth) and visually
( through eyes)

- get information
aurally (through
ears) and visually
(through eyes)

* look at the table above and speak
like examples.

Task 3
* Do model.

T- What are different types of the mass 
media ?

Sts- They are TV, films, books,

magazines,newspapers, radio, plays and
Internet.

T- What features do they have in common ?
Sts- The features they have in common is that
they provide information and entertainment
to people.

T- What are their distinctive /own features ? 
(distinctive /adj / (để phân biệt)- own /adj / 
(của riêng)

Sts- radio provides information and 
entertainment orally, we receive them
through our ears. Television presents
information and entertainment orally and
visually, we get them through our ears and
eyes. Newspapers present information and
entertainment visually, we receive them
through our eyes

* Work in pairs

- Get information from the table
above to ask and answer with the
classmates such as model.

4/ Consolidation:
5/ Homework:

</div>
(77)<div class='page_container' data-page=77>

Write a short passage about featuers of types of the mass media (about 50 words)

Nov 19th, 2008

unit 7 the mass media

Period 39 Lesson 3 Listening

I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to listen a short news edition, and say about the features of the types of the mass
media they have in common or distintive.

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will develop their ability to listen to news editions
II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, cassette, pictures
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 3') Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of checking Class Ps’

attendence Absentees

10A
10D

2.Previous lesson check :(1') Write a short passage about featuers of types of the
mass media (about 50 words)

3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

Warm up

* Provide three clues about the word
News/ news broadcast. Ss have to

guess the word. If Ss guess the word in
the first clue, they get 30 points , 20
points in the second clue and 10 in the
third clue.

1. It is one of the radio programmes.
2. It broadcasts daily and live from 
radio station.

3. It updates you with the latest 
information, current affairs 
domestically and internationally.
Check and give answers:

News/ news Broadcast.
* Leadin to new lesson

* Work in group:

- Discuss and give the correct words

A/ Before you listen

* Ask pupils answer some questions
1- What is radio used for ?

2- How often do you listen to 
radio ?

3- What is the different between getting

information from radio and

television ?

4- What programme do you like 
listening to

and why ?

* Close the book and answer the teacher's
questions:

1- Radio is used for listening to news and
music...

2- Yes, often.

3- The radio provides information and
entertainment aurally and we receive them
through our ears. And TV presents information
and entertainment visually, we receive them
through our eyes.

4- I like listening to the news because there are a
lot of good information

B/ While you listen
 Task 1:

* Listen to the two radio news stories

and tick the words you hear in the right
column under News story 1 and News

</div>
(78)<div class='page_container' data-page=78>

story 2.

* Turn the radio on first time
* Turn the radio on second time
- Check some pupils

* Turn the radio on third time
- Give the correct answers if need
Keys:

News 1 News 2

healthy v

strong v

young v

cloudy v

highest v

wonderful v

Task 2:

* Listen to the radio news stories again

and fill in the missing words

* Turn the radio on first time
* Turn the radio on second time
- Check some pupils

* Turn the radio on third time
- Give the correct answers if need
Keys 1:

1- has caused floods
2- have left their homes
3- have risen

4- two metres
5- has stopped
6- cloudy
7- strong wind
Key 2:

1- twenty-third
2- 4,418

3- California
4- wonderful

5- young and healthy
Task 3:

* Listen to the radio news stories again

and answer the following questions.
* Turn the radio on first time

* Turn the radio on second time
- Check some pupils

* Ask pupils to answer the questions.
1- What has happened during the 
night ?

2- Why have people left their homes ?
3- How many times has the old woman 
climbed MountWhitney ?

4- Why does she climb it so often?

* Listen

* Listen and tick in their paper
* Listen and tick in textbook.

* Read the words they have just marked a tick.

* Scan Task 2 and notice words in the column.
* Listen

* Listen and fill in the paper

* Listen and fill the words you have just heard in
the numbered blanks in the textbook.

* Read Task 3 before and notice the content of
the questions.

* Listen

* Listen and write the answers in the paper
* Listen and answer the teacher's questions
1- Heavy rain has caused floods all over the
country

2- Because rivers have risen

3- She has climbed there for twenty-three times .
4- Because it has kept her young and healthy.

C/ After you listen

- Choose one of the news stories and
tell your classmates about it.

- Suggestion.

* Work in group

- Write the content of one of the news stories in
paper

- One of the pupils in group tells to classmates.
4/ Consolidation:

</div>
(79)<div class='page_container' data-page=79>

Nov,30th, 2008 unit 7 the mass media
 Period 41 Lesson 4 Writing
I. Aims and objectives :

Understand the content of text, ratifying practising task 1,2,3.

By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write the advantages and disadvantages of
the types of the mass media.

II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, 
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 1') Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of checking Class Ps’

attendence Absentees

10A
10D

Date of teaching Class Ps’ attendence

2.Previous lesson check :(5') * Retell the story 1 and story 2. 
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

Warm up

* Divide into group, provide each group a
piece of paper containing information
* Suggest pupils arrange those information
in the order of column

(Advantages/disadvantages of TV)
1- Interfere with family life and 
communication.

2- Make thing more memorable because it 
presents information in an effective way.
3- Make people violent

4- Encourage us to buy things that we don't 
need.

5- Increase the popularity of sports and 
games.

6- make us passive.
7- Entertain us

8- Take much more away from activities 
such as chatting and games.

9- Learn more about the world and to know 
and see many new things.

* Lead into new lesson.

Work in group, discussing
* Read the following information
provided. Arrange information in the
order of column below.

Advantages disadvantages

2 1

5 3

7 4

9 6

* Open the book and read Task 1 to
check, and then correct if they are
different from your choice.

A/ Activity 1:

* Read about the advantages and
disadvantages of TV below.

* Notice new words and structures
mentioned in Task1

- Help/encourage sbd to do sth

- Make sth/sbd + adj

( make sbd violent/ memorable/ passive/ 
aware of sth: làm cho ai/cái gì hung dữ, ko 
thể quên, bị động, hiểu biết về...)

- Interfere with sth/sbd (gây trở ngại cho 
ai/cái gì)

- Popularity (tính phổ biến)

- global ( toàn bộ/ toàn cầu/bao trùm)

* Read Task 1

* Copy new words

</div>
(80)<div class='page_container' data-page=80>

- responsibility (trách nhiệm/sự chịu trách 
nhiệm)

- cost money (tốn kém tiền bạc)
* Lead into activity 2:

* Close the book to practise speaking
about advantages and diadvantages of
TV.

B/ Activity 2:

* Discuss the advantages and disadvantages

of the mass media, and write them down in
columns below.

- Listening to radio
- Reading newspapers
- using the Internet

* Go around and suggest
* Ask one pupil to say
* Correct mistakes if have.
+ Cues:

Advantage Disadvantage

Radio

-Provide you hourly
updated news and
information .

-Make people happy /
make life easier
- broaden/enlarge
people’s knowledge
and understanding
- People can share 
experience /

knowledge each 
other.

- waste time and
make people
passive

- We can't watch
films or sports
programmes.

Newspaper 
- It is cheap .

- Get information on
many fields: culture,
art, business

- Relax and
entertainment

- harm people eyes:
( be short-sighted)
- cost time and
money

- make people
passive

Internet

- Provide quick and

daily access to
information and
entertainment

- Get information on
many fields quickly

- Have influence on
the way people
think/ affects
people 's life .
- Take time away
from activities such
as sports...

* Work in group

- write advantages and disadvantages
down the paper

- One of the pupils in group says

C/ Activity 3:

* Use the discussion in Task 2, write a short
paragragh about the advantages and

disadvantages of one of the mass media:
 - Listening radio
 - Reading newspapers

- Using the Internet
Model:

Advantages of using the Internet
As you know, The Internet plays an
important role in our lives. It provides us 
with information on many fields and a lot of
events of countries. It helps us to enlarge 
our knowledge and understanding. we can 
get information and entertainment quickly. 
It also makes us more successful in our

* Work individually

* Write a short paragragh.

</div>
(81)<div class='page_container' data-page=81>

works. Moreover, we can chat or send 
email to our friends all over the world, not 
to meet each other. So, today, more and 
more people use the Internet .

* Ask pupil to say and write.
* Ask one pupil to remark
* Correct.

* One pupil says before class
* Another pupil write down on the
blackboard.

5/ Consolidation:

4/ Homework:

write a short paragragh about the advantages and disadvantages of using computer:

Nov, 30th, 2008

Unit 7: the mass media

Period 42 Lesson 5: Language focus
I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to distinguishing the sounds and know how to pronunce /ei/, /ai/, /oi/.
- Review the present perfect and adverds: because of + N/ving, In spite of +N/ving
II. Teaching aids :

Lesson plan, textbook
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 3') Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of checking Class Ps’

attendence Absentees

10A
10D

2.Previous lesson check : During lesson
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

Pronunciation
Activity 1

* Ask pupils to close the book.
* Underline the following word or
phrase that has pronounciation
as:/ei/, /ai/, /oi/.

play time today voice
noise wildlife radio toy heigh
buy enjoy type they
destroy newspaper

* Check and give the correct keys
* Read before

Activity 2

* Read "Practise these sentences"
* Underline the word or phrase that has
pronunciation /ei/, /ai/, /oi/ .

* Check and correct mistakes

* Close the book

* Underline and arrange them in the order
of the column.

/ei/ /ai/ /oi/

play time voice

today wildlife noise

radio heigh toy

newspaper buy enjoy

they type destroy

* Open the book to check
* Read after

* Work in pairs: Read and underline and
fill /ai/ei/oi/ under

1- I....afraid....made....mistakes
ai ei ei ei
2- ....changed...timetable....April
ei ai ei ei

</div>
(82)<div class='page_container' data-page=82>

* Ask pupils to read aloud

ai ai ai ei ai ai ai
4- ....like....ride....Friday.

ai ai ai
5- ....noisiest...Royce...I.

oi oi ai

6- While....changing...oil...I...my...
boy.

ai ei oi ai ai
oi

* Read aloud
 Grammar

The present perfect tense

* Give examples and ask pupils to read
and explain

- She has just had breakfast
- We have learnt E for 3 years
* Check

* Exercise 1:

Complete the letter, using the present
perfect of the verds in the box.

* Check

* Ask pupils to come to blackboard.
* Correct mistakes if need

* Exercise 2:

Complete the following sentences,
using for, since or ago.

* Suggest pupils work in group
* Check and give the correct keys
* Ask pupils to speak

Work in groups

* Read and explain the those examples.
- Structure: S+have/has+pp

- Express an action have just happened
- Express an action began in the part, the 
result in the present, maybe in the future.
- Adverds followed: since, for, already, 
never, ever, so far, up to now, recently.
* Do exercise 1: Work in pairs:

1- have been 2- has lived 3- have met
4- have done 5- has had 6- have taken
7- have watched

* Write the correct answer on the
blackboard.

* Do exercise 2: Work in group
1- since 2- ago 3- for

4- for 5- since 6- for

7- ago 8- ago 9- since 10- since
* Speak

Adverd:
* Explanation.

* Phrase and clause of reason.
- because + clause

- because of + N/NP/Gerund

* Phrase and clause of concession (sù
nhỵng bé)

- Although/though + clause
- In spite of + N/NP/Gerund
* Exercise 3:

Complete the following sentences,
using the information in the box.
* Check

1.Because of the cold weather, we kept 
the fire burning all day.

In spite of the cold weather, we all 
wore the shorts.

2. Because of his illness, he had to 
cancel the appointment.

In spite of his illness, he managed to 
come to school.

3. Because of the large crowds, we

* Listen and write the structures

</div>
(83)<div class='page_container' data-page=83>

could not see what was going on.

In spite of the large crowds, there were
enough seats for everyone.

4. Because of the meat shortage, 
everyone is living on beans.

In spite of the meat shortage, we have
managed to get some beef

* Read aloud the sentences that have just
completed.

4/ Consolidation:

Match sentences in A with the suitable information in B

A B

1- They did the test well a- because of his injured leg
2- He couldn't solve the

problem b- though it was difficult

3- The train was late c- although he was good at
mathematics

4- She worked slowly d- though it got dark

5- I went to school on time e- because he worked hard and
methodically

6- I was happy f- because of the thick fog
7- John succeeded in his

exam g- because I passed the exam

8-They continued to work h- in spite of the heavy rain
Keys: 1.b 2.c 3.f 4.a 5.h 6.g 7e 8.d

5/ Homework:

Make sentences with clause of reason and concession

</div>
(84)<div class='page_container' data-page=84>

Ngày soạn: 25/11/2009

Unit 8 -

the story of my village

Period: 43 Lesson 1 - Reading

I. Mục đích yêu cầu:

- Giúp hs đọc hiểu nội dung bài đọc về sự thay đổi cuộc sống ở nông thôn.

- Rèn luyện kỹ năng đọc hiểu cho hs, cung cấp thêm cho hs 1 số từ vựng về làng quê nh:
bumper crops, cash crops , brick houses, straw, mud...

II. §å dïng : 
- Sgk, giáo án.

III.Tiến trình bài giảng :
1.Tổ chøc:

Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees

10B
10C
10D
10E

2.Previous lesson check :(5') 
* Combine these sentences:

The weather is terrible but tourist come here. ( in spite)
I don't like this job although the salary is good. ( in spite of )

These students arrived late because they had an accident. ( because of)
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up: (3 )’

- Gives cross . ask Ps to find the
missing letters

V E

Leads in the lesson.

Ps do in groups
Check their answers
2. before you read(7 )’

* Ask Ps to look at the picture and
discuss the Qs in the book

Call on some pairs present to the class.
Feedback and give correct answers:
1. The farmers are harvesting the crop.
2. They are working very hard

3. It is a good/bumper crop.
4. good farming methods, good 
varieties, modern technology used, 
people work hard...

* Vocabulary Pre- teach.
Straw ( n) rom

Mud (n) bun , ra

Technical high school (n) truong TH ki 
thuat day nghe

Farming methods (n) PP canh tac 
Brick houses (n) nha ngoi

Thanks to (prep ) because of : nho co 
* Ask Ps read vocabularies

- Look at the picture and discuss the Qs in
pairs

- Some pairs present to the class.

- Check their answers

- Read vocabularies

- Read them before the class

- Check mistakes
3. While you read

* Task 1: Vocabulary matching .(6’)
* You are going to read a passage about

- Listen to the scene

</div>
(85)<div class='page_container' data-page=85>

life changes in the country. You read it
and do the following tasks.

* Ask Ps to read the passage and match
the words which all appear in the

passage in A with their definitions in B.
Encourage Ss to guess the meaning of
the words in the context.

- Have Ps compare their answers with a
friend.

- Check and give correct answers:
1.b 2.d 3.a 4.e 5.c

individually.

- Can guess the words
- Compare their answers.

- Answer and explain before the class.

Task 2: table completion .(6’)
* Ask Ps to scan the passage to get
specific information to complete the
table

- Let Ps study the table carefully before
doing the task .

- Check their answers in front of the
class as whole.

- Give correct answers:
Areas of

change Before Now 
House Made of

straw and
mud

Made of 
bricks
Radio and

TV Few families Many families 
Farming

methods Old New

Crops poor Good/ 
bumper
Travel On foot/

bike By motorbike

* Scan the passage to get specific
information to complete the table.

* Study the table carefully and do the task
individually

* Discuss answers with a friend.

* Check their answers

* Task 3 answer questions (6’)

* Ask Ps to read the passage again and
answer the Qs in task 3

Compare their answers with other
pairs .

- Read the passage again and do the task in
pairs.

- Underline some information the support
the answers.

3. After you read (5 )’

* Ask Ps to work in groups and discuss
the Qs

- How can people with an education
help make the life of their community
better ?

- Tell Ps to look back to the passage to
get the ideas for the Qs .

- Feedback

Do the task in groups

- Some groups present to the class.

4. consolidation ( 2' )

* Summarize the main points
5. Homework: ( 2 ' )

* learn all vocabularies by heart , read the passage fluently.
...

</div>
(86)<div class='page_container' data-page=86>

the content of the first term - revision
Period 1: a/ Pronunciation:

/I/, /I:/, / ٨/, /a:/
b/ Grammar:

- The present simple
- Adverd of frequency
- The past simple

- The gerund and to - infinitive
c/ Reading:

- Daily works
- School talk
Period 2: a/ Pronunciation:

/e/, / æ/, / Ɔ/, /Ɔ: /
b/ Grammar:

- The present perfect

- The present perfect - passive voice
- The past perfect

- The past perfect - passive voice
c/ Reading:

- Famous Person's background
Preiod 3: a/ Pronunciation:

/u/, /u:/, /∂/, /∂:/
b/ Grammar:

- The present progressive

- The present progressive with the future meaning
- Be going to

- The + Adjective of person
- Used to + do

- Be used to + doing
c/ Reading:

- Education
- Technology
- An excursion
Period 4: a/ Pronunciation:

/ ei/, /ai/, /Ɔi/

b/ Grammar: Phrase and clause of reason/concession
- Because + clause

- Because of + N/NP/Gerund
- Although/ though + clause
- In spite of + N/NP/Gerund
c/ Reading:

- The mass media

- The story of my village

</div>
(87)<div class='page_container' data-page=87>

Preparing date;………..

Period: 49 revision - 1

I/ Aims - Requests:

Know how to pronunce ./I/,/I:/, /٨/,/a:/
Review The present simple

Adverd of frequency
The past simple

The gerund and to-infinitive
II/ Teaching aids:

Lesson plan, textbook
III/ Teaching process:

1/ Class Organization:

Date of teaching Class Ps' attendance

10A
10D
10E
10K
2/ Oral check: During lesson
3/ New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities
Pronunciation: /I/,/I:/

* See Unit 1- Language focus
Pronunciation: /٨/,/a:/

* See Unit 2- Language focus

* Underline the word or phrase has

pronunciation: /I/,/I:/, /٨/,/a:/, and
then put them in the order of
column.

1- Is he coming to the cinema ?
2- I love my school very much
3- It is an interesting film ?
4- Let's have lunch in the garden
5- I think my cousin is lovely

* Read again the word or phrase has
pronunciation: /I/,/I:/

* Read again the word or phrase has
pronunciation: /٨/,/a:/

* Do exercise

/I/ /I:/ /٨/ /a:/

Is he love garde

n
comin

g much

cinem

a lunch

in lovely

think cousi

n
film

It
Grammar

* The present simple:
S + V( S ) + O + (adv)

- Express an action often happens
I go to school every morning except 
Sunday.

- Express a real action happens for a
quite long time.

He works for an advertising 
companny.

* Listen and write
* Give more examples

</div>
(88)<div class='page_container' data-page=88>

- Express an action always true or
put in timetable (plan).

The first term finishes on January, 
15th.

The sun rises in the East

* Adverds of frequency follow are:
always, usually,(not) often,

sometimes, seldom, rarely, never,
* Applied exercise:

Do again exercises in the Unit 1.
* The past simple

S + Ved + O + (adv)

- Express an action happned and
finished at a definite time in the
past.

She lived in Hanoi when she was a 
little girl.

- Retell a story.

There was once a man, he lived in a
small house. One day, he left his 
house and went into town. From 
then on, he never came back to his 
house...

* Applied exercises:

Do grammatical exercises in Unit 1
again.

* Gerund and to-infinitive:

+ Gerund often acts like a verd and
a noun at the same time, it can also
be the subject or object of a

sentence.
- Be subject:

Learning E is necessary to 
communicate.

- Be object of some verds

you know I usually avoid going to 
parties...

- Be object of prepositions

Choose the best word by cycling 
a,b,c or d.

- Follow the expressions

I'm interested in listening music
Note that gerund is used with an
article, it can not usually have a
direct object.

The learning of foreign language 
(not:the learning foreign language)
* Applied exercises:

Do grammatical exercises 1,2,3
(Unit 2 - language focus)

* Work individually:

- Do exercises in the textbook

* Work individually:

- Do exercises in the textbook

* Work individually:

- Do exercises 1,2,3 in the textbook
(language focus)

4/ Homw work Review: Pronunciation: /e/, /æ /, / Ɔ/, /Ɔ: /
The present perfect

The present perfect - passive voice

The past perfect/ The past perfect - passive voice

</div>
(89)<div class='page_container' data-page=89>

Preparing date:……….

Period: 50 revision - 2

I/ Objectives:

Know how to pronunce /e/, / æ/, / Ɔ/, /Ɔ: /
Review The present perfect

The present perfect - passive voice
The past perfect

The past perfect - passive voice
II/ Teaching aids:

Lesson plan, textbook
III/ Teaching process:

1/ Organization: 1m Checking Ps' attendance

Date of teaching Class Ps' attendance

10A
10D
10E
10K
2/ Oral check: During lesson
3/ New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

Pronunciation: /e/, / æ/
* See Unit 3- Language focus
Pronunciation: / Ɔ/, /Ɔ: /
* See Unit 4- Language focus

* Underline the word or phrase has
pronunciation: /e/, / æ/, / Ɔ/, /Ɔ: / , and
then put them in the order of column.
1- The fat man has a red pen

2- This handbag will be sent to Helen
3- There are ten pans on the shelf
4- Put the socks on top of the box
5- He lost his job as a doctor in the
hospital.

6- Four of them don't like playing sports
any more.

* Read again the word or phrase has
pronunciation: /e/, / æ/

* Read again the word or phrase has
pronunciation: / Ɔ/, /Ɔ: /

* Do exercise below

/e/ / æ/ /Ɔ/ /Ɔ: /

red fat socks four

pen man box sport

sent has top more

ten hand jop
shelf bag doctor
there pans hospital

* Open the book to check whether they
are true.

Grammar

* The past perfect tense:
+ Structure:

S + had + PP + O
+ Usage:

- Express an action had happened before
another in the past.

They had finished their homework before
they went swimming

- Used in the reported speech after

said/told/asked/explained/thought/ 
wondered. It expresses that action had 
happened before a conversation.

I thought I had sent the poscard a week

* Listen and write

* Give the examples
* Give the examples

</div>
(90)<div class='page_container' data-page=90>

before.

She told him that I had done enough 
work for one day.

- Express a hope, not carry out.

I had intended to go for a picnic, but I 
ran out of time.

- Used in unreal conditional in the past
( condition III )

to express an unreal dream/ a condition.
 I wish had had time to do my

homework eysterday.

If only she had told me about it before.

If I had had time, I would have gone 
for a picnic.

* The past perfect - Passive
S + had been + PP

A school had been built here before I 
was born.

* The present perfect tense.
+ Structure: S+have/has+pp
+ Usage:

- Express an action have just happened
It has just stopped raining

- Express an action began in the part, The
result in the present, maybe in the future.
I have learnt E for 3 years

- Adverds: since, for, already,ever, never,
so far, up to now, recently.

* The present perfect - passive.
S + have been + PP

A new hospital for the poor has been 
opened

* Give the examples

* Listen and wirte

* Give the examples

* Give the examples
Applied exercises

* Guide pupils do exercises again 1 -
Unite 2 - language focus and exercise 1,2
- Unite 5 - Language focus.

* Do exercises 1- Unite 2 - Language
focus and Do exercises 1,2 - Unit 5
-Language focus.

4/ Homework:

Review: a/ Pronunciation:
/u/, /u:/
b/ Grammar:

- The present progressive

- The present progressive with the future meaning
- Be going to

c/ Reading:

- Education
- Technology
Preparing date :………..

Period: 52 revision - 3

I/Ojectives:

- Know how to pronunce / u /, / u:/,/∂/, /∂:/
- Review: The present progressive

</div>
(91)<div class='page_container' data-page=91>

The present progressive with the future meaning
Be going to do smth

- The + Adjective
- Used to + V

- Be used to + V ing
II/ Teaching aids: Lesson plan, textbook
III/ Teaching process:

1/ Organization: 1m

Teaching date Class Attendance

10A
10D
10E
10K

2/ Oral check: During lesson
3/ New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

Pronunciation: / u /, / u:/
* See Unit 5- Language focus

* Underline the word or phrase has
pronunciation: / u /, / u:/ , and then
put them in the order of column.
1- Give me your book.

2- Put your hands on the table.
3- Do you like cooking ?

4- Look at your bookshelf, it is full of
books.

5- Tell me your date of birth.

- I was born on June 23rd in 1999
* Check and suggest.

* Correct mistakes if need.
Pronunciation: /∂/, /∂:/
* See Unit 6- Language focus
* Arrange the words has

pronunciation /∂/, /∂:/ in the order.
- person partner teacher river
- excursion thursday nurse our
- year earn clear early
- girl bird dirty firm

* Read again the word or phrase has
pronunciation: / u /, / u:/

* Do exercise below

/ u / / u:/

put book

full cook

bookshelf
June

* Open the book to check whether they are
true.

* Read again the word or phrase has

pronunciation: /∂/, /∂:/

* Do exercise below

/∂:/ /∂/

person partner teacher
river

excursion thursday nurse
our

year earn early clear
girl bird dirty

firm 0

* The present progressive
+ Structure: S + be + Ving + O
+ Usage:

- Express an action happens at the
moment of speaking.

I can not answer the phone, I am 
having a bath.

* Present progressive with a future
meaning ( be+Ving+adv: denoting the
future): talking about plans as in

agenda.(những việc phải làm).
What are you doing tonight ?
I'm doing my homework then I'm 
watching TV.

* Be going to : talking about smth
planed before the moment of

* Listen and write
- Give examples

- Give examples

</div>
(92)<div class='page_container' data-page=92>

speaking or smth which is surely to
happen soon./ prediction.

What are you doing this Sunday ?
I'm going to the cinema with my 
friends.

* Will/Shall: talking about smth
coming out the moment of speaking
What will you do after leaving school
?

I will go home to help my Mun the 
housework.

* The + Adjective

+ "The" is used with some adjectives
(without noun), they always have
plural meaning

Eg: rich - the rich
 blind - the blind
 old - the old
 injured - the injured

unemployed - the unemployed
- Do you think the rich must help the
poor ?

+ "The" is used with noun of 
nationality.

Eg: English - the English
 French - the French
 Spanish - the Spanish

The French are famous for food
- Notice: some of nouns of nationality
must be added "S" .

Russian - the Russians
Italian - the Italians
Scot - the Scots 
* Used to + V

+ Express the habit in the past, not

related to now.

I used to smoke 10 cigarettes a day
when I was young.

* Get used to V ing ( lµm quen víi cái
gì )

I got used to driving on the left-hands
side

* be used to V ing ( đã quen với cais
gì)

After practising many times I'm used 
to driving on the left hands side and 
now it's not diffcult for me to drive.

- Give examples
- Give examples

* Review the grammar
- Give for examples

The blind don't see anything

- Give for examples

</div>
(93)<div class='page_container' data-page=93>

Applied exercises
Exercise 1:

+ Put the verb into the correct form.
1- When I was a child, I used to…
(go)…. swimming every day

2- It took me a long time to get used
to…..(wear)….glasses.

3- There used to …(be)…a cinema on
this corner but it was knocked down.
4- I'm the boss, I'm not used to…(be)

told what to do.
…

5- I used to….(like)….Ann but now
she gets on my nerves

6- He got tired quickly, He wasn't
used to….(run)… so fast.

Exercise 2:

Write noun of person from following
nouns.

1- Britain:………..
2- Scotland:………

3- Japan:………..
4- Germany:………
5- China:…………
6- America:………….
7- Ireland:………….
8- England:…………..

* Work individually.
1- go

2- wearing
3- be
4- being
5- like
6- running

(get on one’s nerves: chäc tøc t«i)

* do exercise 2
1- the British
2- the Scots
3- the Japanese
4- the germans
5- the Chinese
6- the Americans
7- the Irish

8- the English

4/ Homework: Review pronunciation/ ei/, /ai/, /Ɔi/

- Phrase and clause of reason/concession

- Because + clause

- Because of + N/NP/Gerund
- Although/ though + clause
- In spite of + N/NP/Gerund

</div>
(94)<div class='page_container' data-page=94>

Preparing date:………

Period 53 : revision - 4

Iobjectives:

- Know how to pronunce/ ei/, /ai/, /Ɔi/

-Review: - Phrase and clause of reason/concession
- Because + clause

- Because of + N/NP/Gerund
- Although/ though + clause
- In spite of + N/NP/Gerund
II/ Teaching aids:

Lesson plan, textbook
III/ Teaching process:

1/ Organization: 1m Checking Ps' attendance

Date of teaching Class Ps' attendance

10A
10D
10E
10K
2/ Oral check: During lesson
3/ New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

* Pronunciation: / ei/, /ai/, /Ɔi/
Identify the underlined part has

pronunciation differently form the rest.
1- plan take make pay

2- time tiny write miss
3- toy boy voice lose
4- pull full put buy

5- main certain complain explain

* Work individually
plan /plen/

miss /mis/
lose /lu:z/
buy /bai/
certain /s∂:tn/
Grammar

* Because + clause:

- I couldn't come because I was ill.

- Because he missed many lessons, he got 
bad marks.

* Because of + N/NP/Gerund:
- I couldn't come because of being ill.
- He got bad marks because of missing 
many lessons.

* Although/ though + clause:

- Although he smokes 10 cigarettes a day, 
he is quite fit.

- I didn't get the job, though I have all the 
necessary qualifications.

* Listen and write
- Give examples

- Give examples

</div>
(95)<div class='page_container' data-page=95>

* In spite of + N/NP/Gerund or 
this/that/what...

- In spite of smoking 10 cigarettes a day, he
is quite fit.

- In spite of the rain, we came on time.
- She wasn't well, but in spite of that she 
went to school.

- Give examples

Applied exercises
Exercise 1:

Complete sentences with in spite of or
although.

1- ...it rained a lot, we enjoyed our
holiday.

2-...all our carefully plans, a lot of things
went wrong.

3- ...I had planed everything carefully, a
lot of things went wrong.

4- I love music...I can't play it.

5- The heating was full on, but... this the
house was still cold.

6- He decided to give up his job,.... I
advised him not to.

Exercise 2:

Rewrite a new sentence with the same
meaning of the sentence provided, using the
word in bracket.

1- I couldn't sleep although I was tired. (in
spite of)

2- In spite of his injured foot, he managed
to walk. (although)

3- I decided to accept that job although the
salary was low. (in spite of).

4- We lost the match although we were a
better team.(In spite of).

5- In spite of not having eaten for 24 hours,
I didn't feel hungry. (although).

* Do exercise:
1- although
2- In spite of
3- Although
4- although
5- in spite of

6- although

1- I couldn't sleep in spite of being tired.
2- Although he had an injured foot, he
managed to walk.

3- In spite of the low salary, I decided to
accept that job.

4- In spite of being better team, we lost
the match.

5- I didn't feel hungry although I haven't
eaten for 24 hours.

4/ Homework:

Preparing for correcting the first term test

</div>
(96)<div class='page_container' data-page=96>

Dec, 7nd , 2008

Unit 8 - the story of my village 
Period 44 Lesson 2 - Speaking

I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to talk about plans’ results

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to improve their speaking skill
II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handout
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 3') Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of teaching Class Ps'

attendance

Absentees
10A

10D

2.Previous lesson check :(5')

* Write some new words on the board . and make up some sentences .
* Read the passage fluently and answer some Qs .

3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

Warm up

* Arrange letters in the order so that form a
meaning word.

- RODSA

- MEDCALI CTRENE
- BREIDG

- CPORS
- SLOOCH

* Ask some pupil to read the correct word.
- To make life in the village better what
should be done with things mentioned
above ?

* Work in group

- Write them down the paper.
ROADS

MEDICAL CENTRE
BRIDGE

CROPS
SCHOOL
- Read aloud

- Discuss the things should be done to
make life better.

Task 1

* The villagers of Ha Xuyen are discussing
plans to improve their life. Match the plans

with its possible result.

* Give Ps handout

Plans Possible result

1. widen the

road a. children have better learning condition
2. raise and

resurfaced the b. cars and lorries can get to the village

* Work in pairs

- Matching plan with its result

</div>
(97)<div class='page_container' data-page=97>

roads
3. build a

medical centre c. villagers have a shorter way to town
4. build a

football
ground

d. people's health is
looked after

5. grow cash

crops e. young people can play sports
6. build a

bridge over
the canal

f. people can export the
crops and have more
money

g. roads will not be
muddy and flooded after
it rains, and people get
around more easily
Keys

1.b 2.g 3.d 4.e 5.f 6.c 7.a
* After matching, ask and answer.

- Ask and answer with classmate after
matching.

Eg:

Pa- Why should we widen the roads ?
Pb- We should widen them so that cars 
and lorries can get to the village.

Task 2

* Guide pupils practising conversation.
* Ask a group of three to practise
* Check and correct mistakes
* Explanation grammar:
+ Real conditional sentence.

- use: Express condition can happen in the
present or future.

- Structure

Main clause If clause
S+will/shall+

V If+S+V infinitive
Eg:

- If lorries can get to the village, we won't
have to cart heavy loads of farming products
to the city.

- If we resurface and raise the roads, they
won't be flooded and muddy in rain.

- If the roads are widen, cars and lorries can
get to the village.

* Practise in group of three.

* Practise the task 2 in the textbook.
Pa-...

Pb-...
Pc...

Task 3

* Guide pupils practising task 3 by doing the
same task 2.

* Check and correct mistakes
Give suggested answers:

A. I think we should build a football ground ,
too.

B: I completely agree with you . If a football 
ground is built , young people can play 
sports to improve their health.

C: A football ground is also a place where 
people can meet and exchange ideas.

A: What about a medical centre ? I think it is
necessary to built a medical centre.

B. That a good ideas. If a new medical centre
is built ,People' health will be looked after 
better .

C: yes . if our health is looked after better, 
we can live longer.

* Work in groups
- Discuss with partners
- Write their discussion out

- Practise speaking before the class

</div>
(98)<div class='page_container' data-page=98>

4/ Consolidation:
5/ Homework:

Write conversation in task 2 and 3 down your textbook

Write a paragragh about 50 words about plan how we do to improve our life in
the countryside.

Preparing date :………

Unit 8 - the story of my
village

Period 45 - Listening 
I. Aims and objectives :

- Pupils listen and understand the changes in a small town in England- Popffero.
- Listen and understand information to decide wherether the statements are T or F
- Listen and find out missing information from listening to fill the blanks

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to compare the past and the present of the
town ; improve listening skill

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handout, cassette
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 3') Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of

teaching

Class Ps' attendance Absentees

10A
10D
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : during lesson
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

Warm up

* Answer the teacher's questions

1- Have you ever heard of "Popffero" ?

2- What is it ?

3- Where is it ?
* Lead into lesson

* Answer the teacher's questions
1- Yes, I have/No I haven't
2- It is a name of a town
3- It is in England

Before you listen

* Look at 2 pictures, the first one is scence
of Popffero town in the past, the second is
now. Discuss the difference between them.

In the past Now

there was not car

park in the town there is a big car park with a lot of

* Discuss in groups

- In the past, there were buffaloes 
grazing in the field, but now there 
were't fields for buffaloes

</div>
(99)<div class='page_container' data-page=99>

car inside
The roads were

narrow and dirty they are wider and cleaner
the buffaloes were

grazing in the fields there aren't any buffaloes grazing in
the fields

the town had got
only small houses
in the town

there are tall
buildings in the
town

there weren't any

hotels in the town there is a hotel in the town
* Guide pupils say

* Check and correct mistakes

- In the past, the roads were 
narrow, but now the roads are 
widened and resurfaced

- In the past, town had got many 
trees, but now they are replaced 
with buildings.

- In the past, there was not car 
park, but now ,there is a big one

While you listen

* Someone is talking about the changes his
towm, you listen to the talk to do the task 1
and 2 below.

* Task 1:

- Try best to listen to the talk and decide if
the following statements are true or false.
* Turn cassette on first.

- Check the first time, true or false
* turn cassette on second

- Check the second time
* Turn cassette on third

- Check the final and give keys

* Task 2:

- Listen again and find out the missing
words, according to the talk.

* Turn cassette on first.

- Check the first time, true or false
* turn cassette on second

- Check the second time
* Turn cassette on third

- Check the final and give keys

* Pre-read task 1 and notice ideas of
each statement.

* Listen the first time

- Write them down the paper
* Listen the second time
- Write them down the paper
* Listen the third time

- Discuss with partner
- Do the task 1:

1- F . Popffero is a small town on 
the South coast of England.

2- F. It used to be a small quiet 
town.

3- T.

4- F. The big trees on the 2 sides

have been cut down

5- F. Some people don't like the 
chages, they miss the quiet and 
peaceful life.

* Pre-read the passage.
* Listen the first time

- Write them down the paper
* Listen the second time
- Write them down the paper
* Listen the third time

- Discuss with partner
- Do the task 2:

1- houses
2- hotel
3- widen
4- cut
5- car
6- shop

7- department
8- expensive

After you listen * Discuss in group

</div>
(100)<div class='page_container' data-page=100>

* Rely on "before you read" and "Task 2"

in order to discuss with your partner the
changes in your hometown or homevillage.
Eg: In the old days, my village is a small 
and poor one. in the village there weren't 
any bridge houses, the house was made of 
straw and mud, the roads were narrow 
with a lot of slops, but now ……….

After finishing, one in group reports
the changes.

4/ Consolidation:
5/ Homework:

Rewrite the changes in your homevillage ( about 50 words).
Period: 50 The first term test

Carried out by school s plan’
 Preparing date :……….

Unit 8 - the story of my village
 Period 46 - Writing

I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to write and give a directions .

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write a letter giving directions to a certain
place.

II. teaching aids :

- Textbook, handout.
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 3') Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of

teaching Class Ps’attendence Absentees

10A
10D
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check :(5')

* Retell the changes of your own homevillage
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up: follow directions (5 )’

- Call on some Ps to go the board and follow
T' s directions . Ps who do not follow the
directions correctly will be the loser.
Notes: using : turn right , turn left , go a
head , go past the door ...

Ps play in groups

2. Task 1 (8 )’

- Have Ps work in pairs and do the task
Hang the map on the board

Ask Ps to read the letter again and underline
the words and phrases Ps can use to give
directions. Follow the example in the book
Gather the phrases and write on the board .
Come out of : ®i ra khái

Ps do the task in pairs

Look at the map , read the letter and
find Ann's house

</div>
(101)<div class='page_container' data-page=101>

Turn right >< turn left : rẽ phải/trái
Keep walking : đi tiếp

Go over : vợt qua
Walk past: đi qua

Take the first / second turning on the 
left/right : rÏ lèi rÏ thứ nhất/hai bên 
phải/trái

It is the one with ...
3. Task 2 : (12 )’

- Ask Ps to write the letter independently
and go around the class, provide help when
necessary.

Have Ps compare their writing with a friend.
Introduce peer correction.

Pick up some writings and correct in front of
the class.

- correct answers:
Dear Jim,

I'm very happy to hear that you will come 
here for the summer holiday. I'm writing to 
tell you how to get to my house from the 
Roston Railway Station.

Now, when you come out of the station, turn
right. Keep walking for about 5 minutes. 
You will see a small bridge ahead. Go over 
the bridge, go along the street, go past the 
medical centre on the right. Don t take the ’
turning on the left, keep on until you see a 
car park on your right hand, and go fast the 
car park then take the second turning on the
left. Walk past the small shop. Mine is the 
second house next to the shop, opposite the 
souvenir shop. It 's the one with a green

gate. You can't miss it . I have enclosed the 
map so that you can follow my directions 
easily.

Looking forward to seeing you soon. 
Love,

...

Ps write a letter individually

Compare their writing with a friend.

Check their answers

4. Task 3 (8 )’

- Give out the map of a city and ask Ps to
ask and answer the directions to some
certain places on the map.

Make necessary corrections

Ps do in groups

4. consolidation ( 2') 
* Summarize main points

5. Homework: ( 2' ) Write a letter to a friend , telling her / him the way to 
your house from school.

</div>
(102)<div class='page_container' data-page=102>

Preparing date;………

Unit 8 - the story of my village 
Period 47 - Language focus
I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to distinguish the sounds / au/ and / u/ ; review reported speech and conditional
sentence type 1 .

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able pronounce the sounds /au/ & / u/ clearly and
correctly. ; transform direct speech into reported speech following correct rules.; say the
difference between when and if in conditional sentence type 1 and do relates exercises.
II.Teaching aids :

Textbook,.

III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 3') Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of

teaching Class Ps’ attendance

10A
10D
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check :(5')

Read the letter which you wrote at home .
 3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Pronunciation : (5 )’

* pronounce the sounds /au/ & / u/ clearly
and correctly. ;

* Help Ps to distinguish these two sounds
* Play the tape and ask Ps to repeat
* Call on some Ps to repeat

* Introduce peer correction

- Listen to the teacher

- Listen to the tape and repeat
- Repeat the sounds and sentences
individually.

2. Grammar: 
* Exercise 1 : (10 )’
Reported speech

* Ask Ps to repeat the use and the form of the
reported speech ( statement )

Eg: Lan said I “ study at Kim lien high school
. ”

- Lan said she studied at Kim Lien High 
School “

Notes:

+ If the reporting verb (eg..said) is in the past
the verb in the noun clause will usually also

- Ps repeat the use and the form of
the reported speech

- Copy in the books

</div>
(103)<div class='page_container' data-page=103>

be in a past form.;

+ In reported speech, an imperative is changed
an infinitive.

+ Tell is used instead of say as the reporting
verb.

Eg: She said Watch TV “ ”
 She told me to watch TV

- Ask Ps to do exercises individually

Check the answers in front of the class as a

whole

Give correct answers:

1. An old man said their lives had changed a 
lot thanks to the knowledge their children had
brought home.

2. She said she was going to HCM City soon.
3. I thought the film would be interesting. 
4. She said she couldn't help me /you/him/ her
... because she had too much to do.

5. Rich told me that Anne had written Lim a 
letter.

6. He told me it had taken him 3 hours to get 
there because the raods had been muddy abd 
sprippery.

7. She said she thought it was crazy idea and 
that it wouldn t work.’

8. He announced that breakfast was served 
between 7.00 and 9.00

- Compare their answers with a
friend.

- Check their answers

* Exercise 2:

* Make clear the difference between say , tell
and talk

Say ( without object ) + clause 
Tell ( with object ) + clause 
Talk ( to sbd ) about smt

* Ask Ps to do exercise 2 individually.
* Give correct answers:

1. told 2. said
3. said 4. told 
5. talked

- Ps repeat the differences between
say , tell and talk

- Ps do exercises individually
- Give their answers

- Check their answers
* Exercise3: (9’)

Conditional sentence type1

* Review the use and the form of conditional
sentence type 1

* Ask Ps to do exercise 3 in pairs

* Have Ps compare their answers with other
pairs

* Give correct answers:

- If I don't go out so much, I ll do more ’
homework

- If I do more homework , I'll pass my exam. 
- If I pass my exam, I ll go to medical college.’
- If I go to medical college, I ll study ’

medicine,

- If I study medicine, I ll become a doctor.’
- If I become a doctor, I ll be able to cure ’
diseaces and help sick people.

- Ps repeat the use and the form of
conditional sentence type 1

- Compare their answers with others
- Check their answers

*Exercise 4: (5 )’

</div>
(104)<div class='page_container' data-page=104>

* Ask Ps do exercise 4 in pairs

* Ask Ps to check theirs answers orally
Give correct answers

1. if 2. when 3. if 
 4. if 5. when

- Check their answers

4. consolidation ( 1' )

summarize main points
5. Homework ( 2')

Review reported speech and conditional sentence type 1 ; do all exercise again at home.

Preparing date :………..

Period 53 - Test yourself C

I. Aims and objectives :

* Help Ps to check their knowledge themselves that they learnt from unit 4 - unit 7.
* Help Ps to review : pronunciation, grammar, and vocabulary

* By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to do some exercises by themselves. And know
the form of the tests .

II. Teaching aids :

Textbook, cassette and tape
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 1') Checking attendance

Date of teaching Class Ps’ attendance

10A
10D
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : During lesson
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. listening

* Ask Ps to study the statements
* Play the tape several times
- Give correct answers
A

1. F 2. F 3.T
4. F 5. T

B

1. aren't 2. evening 
3. cinema 4. theatres 
5. knows

Ps listen and do the exercise

Check their answers

2. Reading

* Ask Ps to do exercise individually
* Give some new words:

- Source of entertainment : nguon , 
kenh giai tri

- Not to mention : chua ke den 
- Neither ... nor ( khong ... cung 
chang )

Ps read the passage and do the
exercises

</div>
(105)<div class='page_container' data-page=105>

* Give correct answers

1. Because people don't have to go out 
to watch TV . They don't have to pay 
for expensive seats at the theatre or in 
the cinema. An there are no transport 
to arrange

2. They can see play, films of every 
kind, political discussions and football 
matches.

3. Because they need to do nothing . 
They don't even use their legs and 
make no choice . Everything is 
presented to them.

4. TV will begin to dominate our lives, 
and we don't have time to talk time to 
talk to each and do other things

5. TV, in itself, is neither good nor bad,
TV is as good or as bad as we make it.

Compare their answers with others

Check their answers

3. grammar

* Ask Ps to fill in the blanks with the
correct form of the verb in the box
Check and give correct answers

1. have been / haven't had 
2. haven't given / have paid 
3. said

4. had taken

5. thought / would come 
6. told / have got

Ps do exercise and check their
answers

4. Writing

* Ask Ps to do exercise

* Check and give correct answers
When you come of the bus station, turn
right, and walk along King Street until 
you reach the traffic lights. Turn left at 
the traffic lights into Redham Road. Go
straight along the road. The restaurant
is on the left , after Beach Parade. It's 
quite easy to find.

Ps do the exercise individually.

Check their answers

4. consolidation ( 2' )

Summarize the main points
5. Homework : ( 2')

- Do exercise again at home

- Review some structures and make up sentences
- Prepare the next period

</div>
(106)<div class='page_container' data-page=106>

Preparing day: ………

Period 54 : the first term test 
correction

I/Ojectives:

- Correct the first term test to reinfoce and expand knowledge.
- Explain the grammatical structures which mention in the test.
- Do exercises again

- Answer and explain Ps’ ideas
II/ Teaching aids:

The written test and keys.
III/ Teaching process:

1/ Organization:

Class Teaching date Attendance Absetees

10A

10D
10E
10K

2/ Oral check: no

3/ Correct the written test: (43m)

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

A/ Pronunciation:
- /ә / and / ә:/
-/∂/ and /∂:/
- /u/ and /u:/
- /ð/ and /Ө/
* Guide
* Explain
* Check

* Look up dictionary and write the
international transcription

* Read those words

B/ Grammar:
- Tense of verbs
- Structure
- Preposition
- Relative clause
* Guide

* Explain
* Check

*Do exercises again

C/ Writing:

- Find the grammartical mistakes
- Correct mistakes

* Guide
* Explain
* Check

* Do exercises again

4/ Consolidation: - Ps give their ideas

- Teacher answers Ps’ ideas and explain
5/ Homework: (2m)

Pre-read the unit 9, reading _ Undersea world .

Date of preparation: Jan,10th 2009 Unit 9 - undersea world
 Period 55 - Reading

</div>
(107)<div class='page_container' data-page=107>

I. objectives :

- Help Ps to read about undersea world

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to better their reading skill through doing gap -
filling exercise, asking and answering questions.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, picture , maps , cassette

III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance

Class Teaching date Attendance Absentees

10A
10D
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : Nothing 
3. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ss' activities

1. Warm up: ( 5')

* Question: can you name some sea
animals which you have known?
* Leads in the lesson.

Ps do in groups
2. Before you read (7 )’

* Ask Ps to look at the map and give the
Vietnamese names for oceans on the map.
* Call on some pairs present to the class.
* Check and give correct answers

Arctic Ocean: bắc băng dơng (biển bắc 
cực)

Antarctic Ocean:Nam băng dơng(biển 
Nam cực)

Pacific Ocean: Thỏi bỡnh dng
Atlantic Ocean : Đại tây dơng
Indian Ocean : ấn độ dơg

* Ask Ps to look at the pictures in the book
and name the sea animals in each picture?
The first letter of the word has been given
to help them.

* Call on some pairs read the words aloud
* Check and give the correct answers
Seal ; Jellyfish, Turtle ; Shark.

Ps do the task in pairs

Some pairs read the words loudly.

Check their answers

Ps look at the pictures and do the
task in pairs

Ps read the words aloud
Check their answers

3. while you read (10 )’
* Task 1: gap-filling

* Ask Ps to read the passage and fill in the
blanks with one of the words in the box.
* Gives some new words:

Gulf : (n) vịnh, hố sâu, vực thẳm
Altogether: tỉng céng, nh×n chung
To cover: ( v) bao phđ, che phđ
Challenge: (v) (n) th¸ch thøc
Beneath: ë díi

Overcome: (v) chiến thắng, vợt quá
Submarine: (a) dới mặt biển

(n) tÇu ngÇm

Investigate(v) : điều tra nghiờn cu
Seabed: ỏy bin

Biodiversity: sự đa dạng sinh häc

Surface : (n) bỊ mỈt

Fall in to : đợc chia thành, rơi vào, thuộc

Ps do the task individually.
Listen to the words

Read and repeat all words

</div>
(108)<div class='page_container' data-page=108>

về

A wide range of : nhiều, đa dạng
Starfish (n) sao biÓn

Tiny organism: sinh vËt nhá sÝu,
* Check and give correct answers:
1. Tiny 2. investigate 3.gulf
4. biodiversity 5. samples. 
*Task 2: answering Qs.(8 )’

* Ask Ps to read the passage again.
* Ask Ps to answer the Qs

* Call on Some pairs present to the class.
* Check and give correct answers

1. 75 percent of the earth's surface 
2. By using modern devices

3. They investigate the seabed and bring

samples of the marine life back to the 
surface for further study.

4. We can know a wide range of

information , including water temperature 
depth and undersea populations.

5. They are those that live on or depend on
the bottom like the starfish, those that 
move independently of water currents and 
those that are carried along by the

currents.

6. The marine life would be at stake if the 
sea biodiversity was not maintained.

Ps read the passage again
Ps do the task in pairs
Ps present to the class.

Ps check their answers.

* Ask Ps to read the passage again and
complete the summary of the reading
passage by filling each blank with a word

or phrase given in the box below.
* Ask Ps read the words or phrases in the

box and say them in Vietnamese.

* Call on Ss read the completed sentences
* Check and give correct answers:

1. three - quarters
2. mysterious 
3. modern
4. discoveries 
5. biodiversity
6. huge

7. plans and animals 
8. closely connected

Ps do the task in pairs

Ps read the words in the box and
say them in Vietnamese.

Ps read the completed sentences.
Ps compare with a friend.

Ps check their answers
4. consolidation: ( 3 ')

Retell the passage and translate the summary of the passage in Vietnamese.
5. Homework: ( 2')

- Review new words, read the passage fluently, and answer some questions in the text

book.

- Prepare the speaking lesson.
 January 11th , 2009

Unit 9 - undersea world
 Period 56 - Speaking

I. objectives :

- Help Ps to talk about protecting our ocean.

</div>
(109)<div class='page_container' data-page=109>

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to talk about cause and consequences , offering
solutions and reporting on discussion results.

- Skill developed: speaking skill.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, hand out

III.Teaching process :

1.Class organization

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up (3 )’
- Gives some Qs

What would you do if there were much
rubbish/ plastic bags/ paper in your class?

- Answer Qs

- Put rubbish in dustbin.
- Put plastic bag ...
2. Task 1: (10 )’

- Ask Ps to read some actions that should be
taken to protect our oceans and put them in
the order of importance and then say what we
should or should not do.

Give some new words:
Sparingly (v) tiÕt kiÖm
Threaten (v) đe dọa

Dispose of sth/sbd (n) vứt bỏ cái gì/tống khø 
ai

Herbicide (n) thuèc diÖt cá
Pesticide (n) thuèc trừ sâu
Fertilizer (n) phân bón

Release (n) giải thoát, phóng thích

- in your opinion, which action should you do
to protect ocean at first ?

- Which action shouldn't you do ?

- Call on some pairs read the answers loudly
and explain why ?

- Check their answers and give correct
answers:

We should do:

1. Learn all you can about the ocean.
2. place rubbish and plastic bags ...
3. use water sparingly and do ...
We shouldn't do:

1. fish for species that are limited, ...
2. use herbicides, pesticides, and fertilizers
that ...

3. dispose of fishing lines ...

Do the task in pairs.

Practice all new words that appear
in the lesson.

Answer questions

Compare their answers with a
friend and discuss.

Read their answers and explain.
Check their answers

</div>
(110)<div class='page_container' data-page=110>

3. Task 2: (12 )’

- Ask Ps to read some threats to the health of
the ocean carefully.

- Request Ps to discuss the consequence that
might occur and offer some possible

solutions.

- Call on some groups present to the class.
- Give the possible answers:

Threats consequences Solutions
Beaches

filled with
plastic bags

Polluted

water Place them in proper
dustbin
Whale

hunted for

food

Extinct/

disappear Governmentdon't let
people sell
whale
products.
Oil spilled

from tankers Polluted water Punish captain
Explosives

used to
catch fish

A lot of fish

died Be banned

Pesticides
blown off
the fields in
to the sea

Polluted

water Clean up thewater before
running into
the sea.

- Read the threats carefully.

- Discuss in groups and give some
possible solutions.

- Some groups give their ideas.

- Check their answers

4.Task 3 (10 )’

- Ask Ps discuss about protecting ocean in
groups

Call on some groups report their ideas .

Do in groups.

Check their answers

4. consolidation ( 2') 
 * summarize the main points

5. Home work: (1')

* Write what you should or shouldn’t do to protect our envirnoment
...

January 11h, 2009

</div>
(111)<div class='page_container' data-page=111>

Unit 9 : Undersea world
 Period 57 - Listening

I. objectives :

- Help Ps to listen to some information about whales.

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to know some information about whales through
doing true or false exercise and answering comprehension questions.

- Skill developed: listening skill.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, hand out, tape and cassette

III.Teaching process:

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance 
Date of

teaching Class attendance Absentees

10A
10D
10E
10K
2.Old lesson:

Write what you should or shouldn’t do to protect our envirnoment
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ss`activities

1.Warm up: (3 )’

- Tell some solutions to protect the sea
environment .

Work in groups
- Ps say

2. Before you listen (7 )’

- Ask Ps to discuss some Qs in the book.
1. Do you think whales are fish? Why 
(not) ?

2. Why do people keep hunting whales? 
- Call on some pairs present to the class.
- Give the possible answers:

1. The whale is a animal because it 
raises its young on milk.

2. Because they want to catch whales for
food, oil. Leather and other products.
- Ask Ps to read some new words that
appear the tape and give meaning of

them.

- Mammal(n) động vật có vú

- krill : nhuyễn thể(làm thức ăn cho cá 
voi)

- whaling(v) nghề săn cá voi
- migrate into : di c, di trú
- conservation (n) b¶o tån

- international whaling commission: đy 
ban săn bắn cá voi quốc tế

- community: cng ng
- pressure: sc ộp, ỏp lc

- measure (n) biện pháp, thớc đo

- take strict measure to against sth: áp 
dụng biện pháp triệt để chống lại cái gì
- decrease >< increase : giảm>< tăng

Ps answer Qs in pairs .
P1:

P2:
P3:

Some pairs present to the class.

Check their answers

Ps repeat some new words and give
meaning of the words

</div>
(112)<div class='page_container' data-page=112>

3. While you read (5 )’

* Task 1: true or false exercises

- Ask Ps to read the statements carefully.
Explain some sentences that Ps don't
understand.

Play the tape twice

- Ask Ps to tick true or false

- Play the tape again and ask Ps to check
their answers.

- Give correct answers and play the tape
again

1.F( the whale is the largest animal)
2.T

3.T

4.F (whale populations decrease quickly

due to hunting pressure)

5.T

Ps read the statements and do the
task individually.

Listen to the tape.

Listen to then tape again and check
their answers.

Give the reason

* Task 2:

Answering the questions (10 )’
- Ask Ps to read all Qs carefully.
- Explain some new words .
- Play the tape some times

- Play the tape again and give correct
answers:

1. The blue whale grows to 30 meters in 
length and over 200 tons in weight.
2. Because there is a lot of krill-their 
favorite food in cold water.

3. Cold water in north and south Atlantic

Ocean and the North and South Pacific 
are their good feeding grounds.

4. Heavy hunting is the main reason for 
the decrease in whale population.

5. they have asked international whaling 
commission to stop most whaling.

6. If we didn't take any measures to 
protect whales, whales would disappear 
forever.

Ps read the Qs

Listen to the tape carefully
Answer Qs individually.

Compare their answers with a friend

Listen to the tape again and check
their answers

4. After you listen (5 )’
- Ask Ps to talk about whale
- Suggestion

- their length and weight,

- their feeding grounds and food ,

- the reasons for protecting whales

Ps do the task in groups
Compare their answers

Some groups present to the class.

4. consolidation

summarize the main points 
5. Homework

write about whales
 January 16th,2009

Unit 9 - undersea world
 Period 58 - Writing

I. objectives :

</div>
(113)<div class='page_container' data-page=113>

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to use the description to complete the table and
using the table to write a passage .

- Skill developed: writing skill.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts

III.Teaching process:

1.Class organization 
Date of

teaching Class Ss’ attendance Absentees

10A
10D
10E
10K

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up: (5 )’

- Tell me some information about whales?
( size, feeding habits ...)

- Discuss

- Ps answer the Qs
2. Task 1 (15 )’

- Ask Ps to read the description of the sperm
whale carefully.

+ Help Ps with some new words:
- sperm – whale : cá voi nhà táng
- Carnivore:động vật ăn thịt

- Squid / skwid / (n) mùc èng
- Male >< female nam-n÷
- Calf : con

- Gestation: sù thai nghén,
- Life span: tuổi thọ

- At risk: bị đe däa

- Accidental : tình cờ, bất ngờ 
- Entrapment(n)việc đánh by

- Range & habitat: phạm vi và môi trêng sèng
- Offspring: con vËt míi sinh

-Ps read the task carefully
Practice all new words

Complete the table in pairs

Compare the answer with a friend
Read the answer aloud

Check their answers

Look at the table and talk about the
perm whales.

</div>
(114)<div class='page_container' data-page=114>

- Concern: quan tâm, lo lắng
- vary(v) biến đổi, thay đổi

- habitat: nơi sống, nơi định c
+ Ask Ps to complete the table.

+ Call on Ps go to board and complete

Check and give correct answers

3. Task 2: (15 )’

- Ask Ps to look at the table and write a
paragraph that describes the facts and figures
provided in the table.

-Do the task individually

SPERM WHALE: c¸ nhà táng

Range &

habitat - all oceans- prefer water with high
squid population

Size - Male: 18m in

length;54,000kg in weight
- Female: 12 in length;
17,000kg in weight
Feeding

habits

- Carnivores; eat mainly
squid

- Eat up to 1,500kg of food
daily

Offspring - Give birth to one calf
every 5-7 years

- Gestation period:14-19
months

Life span - up to 60-70 years
Special

features - Biggest animals that haveteeth on earth
- Have the largest brain of
all mammals

Conservation

</div>
(115)<div class='page_container' data-page=115>

- Check and give possible answer
 Dolphins are not fish. They are

mammals that live in the water. Dolphins are 
among the most intelligent animals on earth. 
Although they can be found in all oceans in 
the world, dolphins prefer coastal waters and

bays. The size of dolphins vary greatly. The 
smallest dolphin is just about 50 kg in weight 
and 1,2 meters in length while the largest one 
can weigh up to 8,200 kg and 10 meters long. 
Dolphins are carnivores and they eat mainly 
fish. A female dolphin gives birth to one calf 
every two years after a gestation of eleven to 
twelve months. A dolphin can normally live 
from twenty-five to sixty-five years and some 
species of dolphins can even live longer. 
Dolphin populations are at risk due to the 
pollution of their habitat and accidental 
entrapment in fishing nets.

- Compare the answer with a friend.
Read the paragraph to the class.

Write a paragraph on the board
Check the answer.

4. consolidation ( 2' )

* repeat the way to describe the animal.
5. Home work: ( 1')

* Write the passage about dolphins again. Learn some new words by heart.

January 16th,2009

Unit 9 - undersea world

Period 59 - Language focus

I. objectives :

- Help Ps to distinguish the sounds:/ i∂ /; / e∂ / & / u∂ / ; review should and
conditional sentence type 2

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to practice the sounds and sentences; write the
sentences using should..., I think..., I don't think ...; put the verbs in to the correct
form, using the conditional sentence type 2 appropriately.

- Skill developed: reading, speaking, listening and writing skills.

II.Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts, cassette

III.Teaching process:

1.Class organization :

Date of teaching Class Ss’

attendance Absentees

10A
10D
10E
10K
2.Old lesson:

* write some new words

* read your writing that you do at home.
3.New lesson:

</div>
(116)<div class='page_container' data-page=116>

Teacher's activities Ss' activities
1. pronunciation: (5 )’

- Play the tape some times.

- Distinguish 3 sounds and read again
- Ask Ps to read after the teacher
- Call some Ps read aloud

- Play the tape and ask Ps to read after the tape to
practice the sentences

- Make up some sentences:
/ i∂ / Do you have any idea?
/e∂ / Listen carefully

/ u∂/ He was born in a poor family

- Listen to the tape
- Read in chorus
- Read loudly

- Read the sentences after the
tape

- Give example with 3 sounds
above

2. Grammar and vocabulary: (8 )’
* should

Should+Vinfinitive: express an advice, 
suggestion, a necessary thing to do 
Eg:- You should study harder

- Driver should obey the speed limite
a. exercise 1:

- Ask Ps to read the situation and write sentences
with should or shouldn't + one of the phrases in
the box.

- Call on Ps to read the correct sentences
- Check and give correct answers:

2. you should look for another job.
3. He shouldn't go to bed so late.
4. you should take a photograph.
5. she shouldn't use her car so much.

6. He shouldn't put some pictures on the world.

- Read the task and do them
individually.

- Repeat the use and the form

- Compare their answers
- Check their answers and
explain them

b. Exercise 2: (8 )’

- Ask Ps to read the situations and write

sentences with I think/ I don't think ...should...
- Call Ps to read their answer aloud

- Check and give correct answers

2. I think smoking should be banned, especially 
in restaurants.

3. I don't think you should go out this evening.
4. I think the boss should resign.

- Do exercises individually
- Read their answers before the
class.

- Check their answers

</div>
(117)<div class='page_container' data-page=117>

* Conditional sentence type 2:

- Ask Ps to repeat the use and the form of the
conditional sentence type 2:

- Use: express the actions can't happen in the
present or the future.

- Form:

If clause Main clause

Simple past
tense
If+ S + Ved ,

The future in the past
S + would/ might, could +

Vinfinitive
(Note: - be = were

- There will be a comma after the if clause
Eg: If I were a bird, I would be a white pigeon.
c. Exercise 3: (15 )’

- Ask Ps to put the verbs in to the correct form.
- Call Ps read the correct answers and explain
them.

Extra exercises: Rewrite the sentences

1.He drinks too much coffee. He can't sleep well 
at night.

2. He don t understand his lesson. he gets bad ’
mark

3. He gets up late this morning. He is late for 
school.

4. She stays up late last night. she gets up late 
this mornight

- Repeat the use and the form of
the conditional sentence type 2.
- Give some examples

- Check their answers
- Do exercises individually
- Read the correct answers

- Correct and give correct
answers:

1. didn't go 
2. would fell

3. would take 
4. refused

5. wouldn't get 6. closed down

7. pressed

8. would be 
9. didn't come
 10. borrowed
 11. walked

12. would understand 
- Check their answers
- Do the extra exercises in
groups.

1- If he drunk less, he would 
sleep well

2- If he studied harder, he 
would get good mark.
3- If he got up earlier this 
morning, he wouldn t be late ’
for school .

4- If she didn t stay up late ’
last night, she would get up 
early this morning

4. consolidation:Summarize the main points 
5. Homework: Do these exercises again at home

Make up 5 sentences in conditional sentence type 2 .
Preparing date: feb, 1st 2009 Unit 10 - conservation

Period 60 - Reading
I. Aims and objectives :

 Help Ss to read about conservation.

 By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

+ Use vocabulary items related to the issue of conservation

+ Guess the meaning of words based on contexts and components of the words
+ Can for specific information about conservation

+ Skim for general ideas about conservation. .

 Skill developed: reading skills.
II. teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts
III.Teaching process :

1.Class organization :

</div>
(118)<div class='page_container' data-page=118>

10A
10D
10E
10K

2.Old lesson :

Give the form and 3 sentences, using the conditional sentence type 2.
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ss' activities

1.Warm up (5’)
Guessing game.

T prepares a piece of paper with the word “
conservation “

T asks Ss to ask some Qs yes/ no Qs to guess what the
word is. T can model some Qs .The Qs can be:

- is the word a verb ?
- is it a noun?

- does it begin with “c” ?

Ss take turns to ask Qs. The winner is the one who
can guess the word correctly in the shortest period of
time.

Ss ask some yes/ no Qs to guess the
word.

Use some model Qs

Guess the word as quickly as possible.
2. Before you read (5’)

Ask Ss to discuss the Qs based on the pictures
Ask Ss to do the task in pairs

T goes a round to provide help

Ask Ss to present to the class and others add any other
ideas.

Pre - teaching vocabulary: 
- Dam (n) dap ngan nuoc 
- Destroy(v) end smt: pha huy 
- destruction (n): su pha huy

- constant (adj) always present ( ko thay doi ) 
- play an important part in smt.

- Conserve (v) giu gin , bao ton 
- worsen (v) tro len toi te

- pass laws: thong qua luat

Ask Ss to make sentences with these words to check
their understand.

Ss to do the task in pairs

Some pairs present to the class.
Listen to the teacher

Read after the teacher
Read in chorus

Read all vocabularies individually.
Make some with these words
3. While you read (6’)

* task 1:

You are going to read a passage about conservation. 
While you are reading, do the tasks in the textbook.
T writes the words on the board:

Ask Ss to read the passage quickly and stop at the
lines that contain these words to guess their

meanings.

T checks their answers and give correct answers:
1.c 2.a 3. d 4.b

Ask Ss to reread the words.

Ss read carefully and do the task
individually.

Ss read the passage quickly and stop at
the lines that contain these words to guess
their meanings.

Ss match each word with the suitable
definition.

Ss exchange their answer with other Ss.
* task 2 : true or false.(6’)

You are to read the passage and decide whether the 
statements are true or false.

Ask Ss to quickly read though the statements to get
the ideas.

Ask Ss to read carefully and underline the key words
to understand the main point.

Call on some Ss present to the class.
Give correct answers.

Listen to the require

Ss read the statement quickly.
Ss read the statement carefully and
underline the key words.

Ss discuss their answers with their peers.
Ss give their answers and explain their
choices.

</div>
(119)<div class='page_container' data-page=119>

1. T ( line 2 )
2. T ( line 3 - 5 )

3. True (line 11- 12 )
4. T ( line 15- 16 )

5. F ( without plants, most water would run off as
soon as it falls. Rapid run- off would cause
floods- lines 11-12)

6. F ( we can stop worsening the problem - lines
20-21)

* task 3 (5)

Ask Ss to read through the list of main ideas provide
in the task

Ask Ss to read each paragraph carefully
Have Ss find the most suitable answer for each
paragraph.

Go around to offer help when necessary.
Call on some Ss correct .

Give feedback and the correct answers:
A.3 B.4 C2

Ss read through the list of main ideas
provide in the task

Ss find the most suitable answer for each
paragraph

Ss do the task in pairs

Compare their answers with a friend
Some Ss give their answers

4. After you read (8)
T divides Ss into 6 groups

Ask group1 and 2 to discuss Q1. group 3,4 Q2 and
group 5,6 Q3.

T goes around to help the groups when necessary.
T gives feedback

1.The consequence of losing forest is destroying the 
earth's plant and animal variety.

2. Man and most animals need a constant supply of 
water to live on/ man and animals 3. We should 
protect our environment by passing laws idefence.

Ss do the task in groups.

Ss share ideas with each other.

Some groups to report their ideas to the
class.

Ss check their answers.

4. consolidation :Summarize the main points

5. Homework : Ask Ss to learn by heart all of the new words and read the 
passages fluently.

Preparing date: Feb, 1st 2009 Unit 10 – conservation
 Period 61 - Speaking

I. objectives :

 Help Ss to talk about the new kind of zoos

 By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

+ ask for someone's opinions, and show their agreement or disagreement about the new
kind of zoo.

+ Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of zoo.
+ Report on discussion results

* Skill developed: speaking skills.

II. teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts

III. Teaching process

1.Class organization

Class Teaching date Attendance Absentees
10A

10D
10E
10K

</div>
(120)<div class='page_container' data-page=120>

2.Old lesson:

Write 10 new words in the previous lesson.
Read the passage again and answer some Qs.
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ss' activities

1.Warm up:
Time: 4 minutes

Ask Ss to answer some Qs
Have you ever been to the zoo?

What animals can you see in the zoo and the
wild?

What are zoos opened for?

What do you think of animals live in the 
zoo?

What do you think of animals live in the

wild?

Ss answer the Qs
S1:

S2:
S3:
S4:
S5:

2. Task 1
Answering Qs
Time: 7 minutes

Ask Ss to read through the two paragraphs.
Elicit and teach some new words:

Sensitive(a) nhay cam 
Imprison (v) bo tu

Reconstruct (v) build again 
Breed (v) gay giong

Reintroduce(v) du tro ve MTruong song tu 
nhien

Policy (n) chinh sach

Ask Ss to discuss the Qs using the
information in paragraphs

Go around and help

Feedback and give correct answers:

1. They are opened to help endangered 
animals develop.

The animals are not kept in cages. They can
live in their natural environment.

Ss read the two passages and the
two Qs

Ss practice all new words

Ss read in chorus, in groups, in pairs
, individuals

Ss discuss the Qs in pairs
Ss present to the class in pairs.

Ss check their answers.

3. Task 2:

Time: 7 minutes

Ask Ss to read some ideas about the new
kinds of zoo in the book.

Ask Ss to tick the right box the share their
ideas with a partner.

Before Ss do the task, T elicits some
structures.

Example:

A: Do you think/ do you agree with/ what
do you think of animals may have better 
food in the zoo of the new kind?

B: I think so/ I agree with you / I think / I
think you are right because

There are a lot of favorite foods in their 
natural environment

_ I don't think / I don't really think so 
because There is a little food in the wild 
environment

Do the task in pairs.

Ss present to the class in pairs.

Ss check their answers and other Ss
add more ideas.

4.task 3:

Time: 7 minutes Ss do the task in groups.

</div>
(121)<div class='page_container' data-page=121>

Ask Ss to work in groups to discuss the
advantage and disadvantages of the new
kind of zoo.

Go around and help

Take notes of Ss' mistakes for later
correction .

Ss present to the class.
Other check theirs answers
5. Task 4:

Time: 6 minutes

Call on some Ss to report that their groups
have discussed .

Check some mistakes

Ss report in groups

Ss take note and compare with their
groups' ideas

4.Cosolidation:

- Summarize the main points 
5. Home work: (1')

- write about the advantages and disadvantages of the new kind of zoo.

Preparing day: Feb, 8th 2009 Unit 10 - conservation
 Period: 62- Listening

I. Aims and objectives :

 Help Ss to listen about the forest fires

 By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to:

+ listen to get specific information about forest fires

+ Talk about the cause of forest fires and ways to prevent them.
 • developing : listening skills.

II. teaching aids :

- Textbook, cassette and tapes, handouts
III. Teaching process:

1.Class organization 
Class Teaching

date Attendance Absentees

10A
10D
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : ( 5')

</div>
(122)<div class='page_container' data-page=122>

( call on some groups )
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ss' activities

1. Warm up:
Time: 2 minutes
T Asks some Qs:

Have you seen the forest fires?
What do you think of them ?
What may causes forest fires ?

Ss answer Qs
S1:

S2:

2. Before you listen:
Time: 8 minutes

Ask Ss talk about the causes of the forest fires .
Call on Ss to answer Qs

Feedback and give some possible causes:
 - campfire

- butts of burning cigarette
- lighting

* Vocabulary:

Help Ss to pronounce the words, given in the
book. and give meaning of them

Give some new words from the listening
passage.

Put out (v) dap lua 
A heap of (n) mot dong 
Spread (v) Lan tran.

Ss discuss in groups
Ss answer Qs

Check their answers

Ss read all new words aloud

Ss repeat in chorus and individually.

2. While you listen:
* task 1: numbering events

Time: 6 minutes

Ask Ss to read the sentences in the book
carefully to understand what each of them
about.

Play the tape once for Ss to do the task.

Ask for Ss'answers and write them on the board.
Play the tape the second time for Ss to check
their answers

T check their answers and give correct answers:
3 2 5 1 4

-Ss read the sentences
-Underline key words

- Guessing order of the events with a
friend

- listen to the tape and do the task.
Listen again

Listen again and check their answers

* Task 2 :

Time: 5 minutes

True / false statements

Ask Ss to read through the statements to
understand them and underline key words
Play the tape

Play the tape again for Ss to check their
answers.

Check Ss'answers by calling on some Ss and ask
them to explain their answers

Give correct answers

1. F ( it spreads quickly )
2. F ( in late summer)
3. T

4. T

5. F ( it is the duty of everyone of us )

Ss read the statement carefully and
underline some key words.

Listen to then tape and do the task
individually.

Listen to then tape again and check
their answers

Ss give then answers.

* task 3:

Time: 6 minutes

Choosing the sentences hear.

Ask Ss to read through the statements to
understand them

Ss read the sentences carefully.
Listen to then tape and do the task.
Listen again and check

</div>
(123)<div class='page_container' data-page=123>

Play the tape once for Ss to do the task.
Play the tape for Ss to check their answers.
Give correct answers :

1.a 2.b 3. a
3. After you read:

Time: 7 minutes

Ask Ss to say how a forest fire may start and
what every camper should remember.

Ss do in pairs.

Ss present to the class.
Ss check their answers
3. consolidation ( 2' ) summarize main points

4. Home work: (2') Ask Ss to learn by heart all new words and retell the forest fire.

Preparing: Feb, 9th 2009

Unit 10 – conservation
 Period 63 - Writing 
I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to write a letter of invitation

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to:

- write a letter of invitation using the cues provided.
 * Skill developed: writing skills.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts
III.Teaching process :

1.Class organization

Class Teaching date Attendance Absentees

10A
10D

10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : ( 5') 
 - Write some new words on the board.

- Retell the forest fires given by the listening.
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up: (5)

* Ask Ps to answer some Qs

Would you like to come to the zoo with me ?

Ps answer Qs

</div>
(124)<div class='page_container' data-page=124>

Are you free to go out with me tonight ? 
Do you feel like going out with me tonight? 
Can you play football?

How about going for a walk tonight? 
2. Task 1: Matching (10)

* Ask Ps to read all expressions and match
them.

* Call on Ps to give their answers

* Writes on the board and correct them. Then
give the form of verb in each of the structures:
* Notes: all expressions give invitations or
suggestions.

Let's + V

Why don't you + V 
Would you like + To V 
Do you feel like + V-ing 
Can you + V

How about + V-ing 
Shall we + V

Are you free + to V

T explains and gives correct answers:
1.c 2.f/h 3.a 4.g/d

5. h/f 6.d/g 7.e 8.b

- Do the task in pairs
- Give their answers

- Exchange their answers with other
pairs.

- Repeat the structures and gives

some examples

Check their answers

Task 2 : letter completion (6)

* Ask Ps to read through the letters to

understand the content of each letter roughly.
* Ask Ps to do the task in pairs

* Feedback and give correct answers
1- would you like / are you free

2- would you like / are you free / how about 
3- Can you / why don't we / shall we

- Read the letters
- Do the task in pairs

- Exchange their answers with other
pairs.

- Present to the class
- Check their answers
Task 3: Writing an invitation letter based

on cues (13)

* Ask Ps to write the letter based on cues.

- Go around to observe and help Ps
- Check and give correct answers
Dear Lam,

We haven't met since you moved. I miss you a 
lot. We are both having some days- off

between the two terms soon. If you haven't 
made any other plans, Why don't we spend a 
weekend together?

Do you feel like visiting then forest near my 
grandparent's home again? It looks quite 
different now because very many young trees 
have been planted at the tree-Planting

Festivals.

Do you come if you find it possible, and I'll 
make all the preparations then.

Give my love to your parents.
Your friend,

Nam

- Write the letter individually.
Share with a friend

- Read the letter before the class.

- Check their letters

4. consolidation ( 2 ' ) summarize the points 
5. Homework ( 2') Write the letter again at home

</div>
(125)<div class='page_container' data-page=125>

Preparing: Feb,15th 2009

Unit 10 - conservation

Period 64 - Language focus

I. objectives :

- Help Ps to review and practice the sounds /b/ & /p/ and passive voice
- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to:

+ distinguish the sounds /b/ & /p/

+ Pronounce the words and sentences containing these sounds correctly.
+ use the passive voice appropriately.

- Improve Ss` four skills

II. teaching aids :

- Textbook, cassette and tape , handouts

III.Teaching process :

1.Class organization

Class Teaching date Attendance Absentees

10B
10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : ( 5') 
 Read the letters that they wrote at home.

3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

I. Pronunciation

</div>
(126)<div class='page_container' data-page=126>

* Give a sentences and pronounce it
clearly.

The beautiful pet is my brother's
Distinguish the sounds /b/ & /p/
- Play the tape and ask Ps to repeat in
chorus.

- Call on Ss read all words before the class.
- Checks the mistakes.

- Play the tape and ask Ps to repeat all

sentences in chorus.

- Ask Ps listen and underline the words
with the sounds and write /b/ or /p/ under
them.

- Ask Ps to practice the sentences in pairs
- Check the mistakes and play the tape
again.

- Listen

- Repeat in chorus
- Listen and repeat

- Read individually before the class.
- Listen to the tape and read in
chorus.

- Listen and underline the sounds
- Practice reading

- Read in front of the class.

2. Grammar 
Passive voice

* Elicits the form, meaning and use of the

passive voice.

Notes: The passive voice

Form : BE + PAST PARTICIPLE
Example:

Lan eats dinner ( active)
S V O

Dinner is eaten by Lan
Dinner was eaten by Lan
Dinner is being eaten by Lan
Dinner was being eaten by Lan
Dinner has been eaten by Lan
Dinner had been eaten by Lan
Dinner will be eaten by Lan
Dinner can be eaten by Lan

Dinner is going to be eaten by Lan
* Ask Ps to do exercises in book
* Go around to provide help
* Ask other Ps to comments.
Give correct answers:

Exercise 1:

1. were reported 
2. grow

3. be spoken
4. am not invited 
5. are being built 
6.

Exercise 2:

1.came; had started/had been started; 
were

2.is standing; is being photographed.
3. have ...been told

4. was being laid; decided
5. will...be planted.
Exercise 3:

1.Was organized

2. arrived 6.(had been) put7. was

- Listen and copy in their books.

Look at the examples and remark

- Do exercises individually.
- Compare their answers with a
partner

- Go to board and write their answers

- Check their answers

- Do exercises individually
- Repeat their answers

- Do the task in pairs.

- Some pairs practice the completed
conversation.

</div>
(127)<div class='page_container' data-page=127>

3. were met
4. taken 
5. had been 
cleaned

8. prepared
9. made

10. were served 
4. consolidation ( 3') :

Summarize the main points.

5. Homework: ( 2') do exercises again

Preparing : Feb,15th 2009

Unit 11 - national parkS
 Period 65 - Reading

I. objectives :

- Help Ps to read about some national parks.
- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to:

+ use vocabulary items related to national parks
+ guess the meaning of words based on contexts
+ scan for specific information about national parks.
* Skill developed: reading skills.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts

III. Teaching process :

1.Class organization :
Class Teaching

date Attendance Absentess

10B
10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : ( 5') change these sentences in to passive.
- My brother does his exercises every day.

- They built this house in 1999

- Somebody is cleaning the room at the moment.
- Somebody was cleaning the room when I came.
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

</div>
(128)<div class='page_container' data-page=128>

Discussing the Qs

* Ask Ps to look at the pictures of three
nationals on page 112 and tell the class
anything they know about these parks.

* Ask Ps to work in groups of 5 to discuss the
Qs in the textbook.

* Goes around to provide help
* Check and give correct answers:

1. yes, I have

2. Cuc Phuong, Cat tien, Cat Ba, U Minh,
3. specious animals and plants , such as:

1,000-year-old tree.

* Teaches some vocabulary items:
- To be located in: năm ở

- Establish (v) set up

- Rainforest (n) rừng ma nhiệt đới 
- Orphan (n) trẻ mồ côii, thu mat me. 
 (v) to make sb an orphan 
- Orphanage (n)trại trẻ mồ côi 
- Tropical (a) thuộc về nhiệt đới 
- Temperate (a) thuộc về ôn đới
- Toxic (a) độc

- Hike (v) ®i m¹nh mÏ 
- Survival (n) sù tån t¹i

- Abandon (Vi) : từ bỏ , bỏ rơi , ruồng bỏ
- Sub-tropical wilderness(n) khu bảo tồn 
hoang dã cận nhiệt đới

- Nearby land (n) đất lẫn cát 
- Contamination (n) sự nhiễm độc

discuss Qs in pairs
- Present to the class.

- Listen to the teacher
- Read in chorus

- Read in groups, individually.
- Make sentences with above
words to check their

understanding

2.While you read (7)

* task 1: Matching based on word guessing 
* Ask Ps to read through the passages silently.
* Ask Ps to read the definitions to identify the
part of speech of the word .

* Ask Ps to find the word in the passages that
best suits each of the following definitions.
* Go around to help Ps when necessary.
* Check and give correct answers:
2. contain 5. sub-tropical 
3. species 6. contamination 
4. survival

- Read the passage silently
- Read the definitions
- Do the task individually
- Present and explain their
answers.

* Task 2: answering questions (9)
* Ask Ps to skim the six questions to
understand them

* Ask Ps to underline the key words .
* Ask Ps to read the text and find the
information to answer Qs

* Check and give correct answers:
1. 200 square km (line 4 )

2. Because the rainy season is over(line7) 
3. They can learn about the habits of animal, 
how to recognize the different species of 
animals and plants, and how one species is 
dependent upon another for survival. (line 
11-13)

4. In the orphanage, orphaned or abandoned 
animals are taken care of.(line 14-15)

5. Because of the toxic levels of chemicals in

- Read the Qs individually

- Underline the key words in the
Qs.

- Read the text
- Answer Qs

- Write their answers on the board
and explain.

</div>
(129)<div class='page_container' data-page=129>

the water.(line 19-21)

6. Plants and animals will die/ be killed ( line 
21-22 )

3. After you read (7)

* Ask Ps to read passages again and give the
reason why you would like to visit the

national park .
* Suggestion:

Reasons for visiting Cuc Phuong National
Park

- It is not far from Hanoi, so it is easy to come
- There are many 1,000 year-old trees to see
- Can study butterflies and plants

- Can visit caves which we have never seen 
before

- Hike mountains for entertainment

- Do in groups

- Some groups present to the class.

4. Consolidation ( 2') summarize main points

5. Home work (1') What can you learn after visiting National Park?

Sunday, February 28th,2009

Unit 11 - national parks
 Period 66 :Speaking

I. objectives :

- Help Ss to talk about excursion.

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to:

+ use conditional sentences type 3 to express regrets
 - Develop S s’ speaking skill.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts
III.Teaching process :

1.Class organization

Class Teaching date Attendance Absentees

10A
10D

2.Previous lesson check : ( 5') 
- Write some new words on the board.

- Read the passage and answer some questions.

3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up:

- Introduces and ask Ps some Qs

Last year we had a camping trip at school or a
picnic with your friends ?

- Tell me what you prepared for that trip?
- Check and give correct answers:

- We prepared food, drinks, tents, blankets,
candles or noodles...

- Listen and answer Qs in groups.
Group 1:

Group 2:

2. Task 1 
Matching

- Ask Ps to read the instruction in the book

</div>
(130)<div class='page_container' data-page=130>

and say in to Vietnamese

- Ask Ps to read all sentences in the two

columns.

- Elicits some new words or expressions:
Excursion(n)chuyến thăm quan

Disaster (n)hỏa hoạn
Get a cold cảm lạnh

Food poisoning: ngộ độc thức ăn
Fine (n) tiền phạt

Get lost: unable to find way: lạc đờng
Carsick (a) say xe

- Ask Ps to work in pairs to do the task
- Go around to observe Ps working.
- Check and give correct answers
1.f 2.e 3.h 4. g 
 5. b 6. c 7. a 8. d

- Practice some new words

- Do the task in pairs

- Present to the class in pairs.
- Check their answers

3. Task 2

- Ask Ps to read the instruction in the book

and say in to Vietnamese

- Ask Ps to read the examples on page 115 and
remark the form of structures.

* The conditional sentence type 3:

If + S + had + PP, S + would/ could +
have + PP

+wouldn t/couldn t+have+PP’ ’

Use: used to talk about unreal situations in the
past.

( express regrets)

- Ask Ps to do the task in groups
- Check and give correct answers:

1. If we hadn t gone to Huong pagoda by ’
coach, we wouldn t have got carsick.’

2. It we had brought enough food and drinks, 
we wouldn't have spent a lot of money eating 
in expensive restaurants.

3. If some of us hadn't had food poisoning,

We could have enjoyed our visit.

4. If we had had rain coats, we wouldn't have 
got wet and have had a cold.

5. If some of us hadn t left our luggage on the ’
coach when we arriveed, we would have had 
clothes and money with us.

6. If we had been careful when walking in 
Huong pagoda, we wouldn t have got lost.’
7. If we hadn t thrown waste in the forest, we ’
wouldn t have got a fine.’

8. If we had stayed there more than one day, 
we would been able to visit all the pagodas.
- Do the same with others , using the ideas in
task 1.

- Read the instruction

- Read the example and give some
other examples.

- Copy in their books

- Do the task in groups

- Speak out their answers to the
class

- Other listen and check their
answers.

- Other write the correct sentences
on the board.

4.Task 3

You are Nga, tell him/her about class’s
excursion to Huong pagoda and express
regrets about what you did or didn’t do during
the excursion.

- Do in pairs .

A student is Lan and another is 
Lan' friend .

</div>
(131)<div class='page_container' data-page=131>

Eg:

Pa: We went to Huong pagoda by coach, so 
most of us got carsick.

Pb:If we hadn t gone to Huong pagoda by ’
coach, we wouldn t have got carsick ( If we ’
had gone to Huong pagoda by bike, we 
wouldn t have got carsick).’

- Ask Ps to continue the talk, using the ideas

in Task1 and Task2 as the example.

- Check and correct

- Some pairs present to the class.

4. Consolidation ( 2') Summarize the main points.

5. Homework: (1') Tell what they did and express regrets.

Preparing date: Feb, 28th, 2009

Unit 11 - national parks
 Period 67 - Listening

I. objectives :

- Help Ps to listen to Cuc Phuong national park.

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to listen to get specific information bout Cuc
Phuong National Park .

- Improve Ss’ listening skill.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts , tape and cassette

III. teaching process:

1.Class organization :

Class Teaching date Attendance Absentees

10A
10D

2.Old lesson : ( 5')

Write some new words on the board.

Tell what Lan and Lan'friend did and express regrets during the excursion
What did you do last Saturday?

What about the means of transport your class used to go to Huong Pagoda ? 
What about the food and drink?

What would have happened if you hadn t brought food and krink?’
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Before you listen.(5)

* Ask Ps to ask and answer Qs in the
textbook .

* Call Some Ps to present to the class.
* Check and give correct answer.

1. It is in the Southwest of HN 
2. It contains over 200 Km2 of rain

forest

3. It is during the dry season , from 10-

- Do in groups

- Ask and answer Qs
- Check their answers

</div>
(132)<div class='page_container' data-page=132>

4

4. Butterflies, caves, mountains and the
1,000-year-old trees..

* Ask Ps to listen and repeat some
vocabularies.

* Give some other vocabularies

- Listen and repeat in groups and give the
meaning of the words

2. While you listen (8)
New words:

- flola(n) hệ thực vật
- fauna(n) hệ động vật

- enemy(n) kẻ thù
- span(v) trải rộng
- attack(v) tấn cụng

- invader (Qing invader (n) quân xâm lợc
nhà THANH )

- Defeat(v) xâm lợc

- officailly(adv) chính thức

- ethnic minority(n) dân tộc thiểu số
- bee keeping(n) nghề nuôi ong
- station(v) đống quân

* Task 1:

* Ask Ps to study the sentences and guess
the missing words.

* Reads the sentences and ask Ss to repeat
them

* Play the tape and ask Ss to listen and fill in
the missing words

* Play the tape again and ask Ss to check
their answers.

* Pause the tape and give correct answers:

1. 1960

2. 160 Km south west of 
3. 100,000 visitors 
4. 2,000; 450
5. surprise attack

- Study the sentences

- Repeat the sentences in groups

- Listen to the tape and do the task individuals
- Listen again and check their answers.

3. Answering questions.(10)

* Ask ps to study the Qs to understand them
and then underline keywords.

* Play the tape and ask Ps to pay attention to
the key words.

* Ask Ps to write down the answers
* Play the tape again and ask Ps to check
their answer ( T can pause the tape if
necessary)

* Call on some Ps write their answers on the
board.

* Check and give correct answers

1. It covers 3 provinces: Nbinh, HBinh and 
Thanh hoa .

2. It is about 160 Km

3. They come there to see the work being 
done to protect endangered species.

4. Nguyen Hue defeated the Qing invaders 
in the spring of 1789.

5. They live mainly on bee keeping and 
farming.

- Study the Qs and underline the key words.
- Listen to then tape

- Write down then answers and compare with a
friend.

- Read the answers and write on the board.
- Check their answers.

- Listen again and check

3. After you listen (8)

* Ask Ps to talk about the special features of

Cuc Phuong National Park.

- do in groups

</div>
(133)<div class='page_container' data-page=133>

EX : in 1960 ...
In 2002...
In 1789 ...
...

4. consolidation ( 4 minutes )

* Talk about Cuc Phuong national park in groups .
5. Homework ( 3 minutes )

* Write about Cuc Phuong national park ( about 60-80 words)

Sun February 28th, 2009

Unit 11 - national parks
 Period 68 - Writing

I. objectives :

- Help Ps to write a letter of acceptant or refusal

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write letters of acceptance or refusal.
- Develop Ss’ writing skill.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts ,
III. Teaching process :

1.Class organization :

Class Teaching date Attendance Absentees

10A
10D

2.Previous lesson check :

- Write some new words on the board.
- Retell about Cuc Phuong national Park ?
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up (5)
* Give some Qs

1. Have you ever written a letter ?
2. How often do you write it ?
2. Who do you often write to ?

* List some types of letter you know ?
invitation letter

application letter: th thỉnh cầu
Complanation letter: th phàn nàn

thank you letter

love letter

refusal/declining letter: th tõ chèi
 acceptance letter th chÊp nhËn
 reply/response letter: th tr¶ lêi
delight(n) sù vui síng

* Leads in the lesson.

- Answer some Qs in groups .
- Some groups present to the class.

2. Task 1: filling in the blanks (8)

* Ask Ps to read through the expressions in the
table to understand them.

</div>
(134)<div class='page_container' data-page=134>

* Emphasis some ways of accepting and
refusing.

* Ask Ps to fill in the blanks in pairs

* Call on some Ss to go and write their answers
on board.

* Call for peer correction and give T's own
feedback.

* Suggested answers:
1. I'd like to ...

2. I m afraid I can t come because ’ ’
3. That's a great idea !

* Ask Ps discuss the features of a letter of 
acceptance or refusal.

refusing.

- Fill in the blanks in pairs.

- Go to board and write their answers

- Check their answers .

3. Task 2: ordering

* Ask Ps to do the task individually and
exchange their answer with another Student
when they have finished.

* Call on a student to read then letter out loud
and ask other Ss to listen and give feedback.
* Comment and give correct answer.

1d 2e 3c 4a 5f 6b

- Do the task individually

- Compare their answer with a friend.
a student to read then letter out loud and
ask other Ps to listen and give feedback.

4. Task 3: : (15)

Writing letters of acceptance or refusal
* Reminds them that they should pay attention
to all the features of this type of letter and be
careful with some other written conventions
such as capitalization, punctuation...

* Ask Ps to write then letter individually.
* Go around to observe and provide help.
Dear Thanh ,

Thank you for inviting me to join your picnic to 
Cuc Phuong national Park, I'd like to but I 
can't because I'm very busy learning my old 
lessons to prepare for my coming test. 
Let's go another time.

Love,
Lien .

OR
Dear Lan,

It s lovely to hear that you are going for a ’

picnic to cuc Phuong national park next

weekend. Thank you for inviting me to join you.
I am sure it will be a lot of fun, but I am afraid 
I can not make it.

My English friend, Mary, is coming to VN next 
weekend and I have promised to cook her some
of traditional dishes on Saturday morning. 
After that, I am going to take her to some 
famous places in Hanoi.

I hope that you will have a wonderful day in 
Cuc Phuong. Remember to show me photos you
take in Cuc Phuong when you get home.

Love,
Anh

- Repeat the features of this type of letter
and do then task individually.

- Share with a friend.

- Read the letter loudly before the class.

4. consolidation ( 2') 
 * summarize main points .

5. Homework: ( 1')

</div>
(135)<div class='page_container' data-page=135>

* Write a letter of acceptance

Sun, February 28th, 2009

Unit 11 - national parks
 Period 69 - Language focus

I. objectives :

- Help Ps to consolidate unit .

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to distinguish the sounds /t/ and /d/ and
pronounce the words and sentences containing these sounds correctly ; use the passive
voice appropriately.

* Skill developed: reading, speaking and writing skill.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts ,

III.Teaching process :

1.Class organization :

Class Teaching date Attendance Absentees

10A

10D

2.Previous lesson check :

* Read the letter which wrote at home .
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1.Warm up:

* Listen to me carefully and say what sound
you are going to learn today .”

Team, toe, ten , top, tooth , plant, protect , 
indirect, intention , hope.

Damp, door, damage, doctor , intend , 
depend.

* Distinguishes the sounds /t/ and /d/ and
leads in the lesson.

- Listen to teacher.

- Listen and give the sounds
 / d/ and /t/

2. Pronunciation:
* Plays the tape

* Ask Ps to repeat the tape three times
* Ask Ps to repeat individually

* Give feedback.

- Listen to the tape
- Repeat the tape
- Read individually
Others correct mistakes.
3. Grammar and vocabulary.

a. Real condition in the present and future. 
(type 1)

+ Presentation

* Ask Ps repeat the form and the use .

- Go to board and write down the form of
third conditional.

</div>
(136)<div class='page_container' data-page=136>

* the conditional sentence type 1:
If +S +simple present, S +will/ can 
+Vinfinitive

+ Express a real action in the present and 
future

b. Unreal condition in the present and

future. (type 2)

+ Presentation

* Ask Ps repeat the form and the use .
* the conditional sentence type 2:

If +S +simple past, S +would/ could 
+Vinfinitive

+ Express an unreal action in the present and
future.

c. Unreal condition in the past. (type 3)
+ Presentation

* Ask Ps repeat the form and the use .
* the conditional sentence type 3:

If +S +had +PP, S +would/ could 
+have + PP

+ Used to talk about unreal situations in the 
past. ( express regrets)

* Ask Ps to do exercises 1 and 2
* Go around to provide help.

* Ask Ps to compare their answers with
another

* Ask Ps go to board and write their answers
* Check and give correct answers :

Exercise 1:

1.Had known 5. could have 
enjoyed

2. had had 6. Had known
3.would have

gone 7. had stopped
4. would have

pass 8. had killed
Exercise 2:

1. If the driver in front hadn't stopped so 
suddenly, the accidents wouldn't have 
happened.

2. If I had known that Lam had to get up 
early, I would have woken him up

- Do the exercises 1, 2 individually.
- Compare with a friend

- Write on the board

- Check their answers

- Read the correct sentences loudly.

* Exercise 3:

* Ask Ps to do exercises 3 in pairs

* Feedbacks and gives suggested answers:
1. If I had been working at the restaurant last 
night, I would have waited on your table. 
2. If they had been playing attention, They 
would have seen the sight making their exit 
from the highway.

3. Carol could have answered the phone if 
she hadn't been studying.

4. If the sun hadn't been shining, we wouldn't 
have gone to the beach yesterday.

5. If the music hadn't been playing loudly at 
the restaurant, I would have heard everything

- Do the exercise 3 in pairs

- Compare the answers with a partner.
- Read out the answers before the class.

- Check their answers

</div>
(137)<div class='page_container' data-page=137>

Mr. Lee said during dinner.

4. consolidation : - Repeat the use and the form of the conditional sentences 
type

3 and give some examples .
5. Homework : - Redo exercises at home

Sat, march 7th, 2009

Period 70 : Test yourself D
I. Aims and objectives :

*Help Ps to check their knowledge themselves that they learnt from unit 8 - unit 11.
* Help Ps to review : pronunciation, grammar, and vocabulary

* By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to do some exercises by themselves. And know
what the form of the test is .

* Skill developed: reading, speaking and writing skill. 
II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts , cassette and tape
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance 
class Teaching

date Attendance Absentees

10B
10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : ( 3')

* Repeat the use and the form of the conditional sentences type 3 and give some examples. 
3.New lesson

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Listening (10)

* Ask Ps to study the questions to answer
them.

* Give some new words:

- Geyser (n) mạch nớc khoáng phun 
- Campground : sân cắm trại

- Trails or paths : ng, lối mịn
- nature(n) thiên nhiên

- tent(n) lỊu b¹t
- hole(n) hè

- two and a half million: 2,5 triệu
- allow(v) đợc phép

- pick(v) hái ngắt
- either: cũng

* Play the tape some times
* Suggestion

1. People go to national park to enjoy 
nature.

- Study the Qs first

- Listen to the tape and answer 5
questions below

</div>
(138)<div class='page_container' data-page=138>

2. in 1872

3. No, it isn't. it is the world's oldest

national park and the world's largest park.
4.It has about seventy geysers in the park.
5. Visitors mustn't pick the flowers and 
feed or hunt the animals.

2.Reading (10)

* Ask Ps to read passage
* Give new words if need

* Guide doing exercises
Suggestion:

1. a. junk and litter b. landscape 
 c. highway d. healthy 
2. a. T b. T

c. F d. F 
 e. F f. T

- Ps do the exercises individually.

3. Grammar: (10)

a. has been cleaned / have been turned on
/ are waiting

b. knew/ would help / knows.

c. decided / to stay / would have gone out /
hadn't been.

- Ps do individually
- Check their answers

4. Writing : (10)
Dear Alex,

You will be delighted to know farther is 
giving a party to celebrate the new year.

He has invited some of our relatives and 
his friends to make the party a success. I 
too have invited a number of my friends in
the neighborhood. Mother has asked med 
to tell you to come home for the new year 
celebration.

I'm sure you will be here in time to share 
the fun with us on that day.

Your sister, Helen.

- Ps do individually
Check their answers

4. Consolidation ( 1') review - The conditional sentences 1,2,3
- Pasive voice

5. Homework ( 1') Redo the test at home.

</div>
(139)<div class='page_container' data-page=139>

Sat, march 7th, 2009

Period 71 Written Test 3
 Aims and objectives :

*Check Ps' knowledge that they learnt from unit 8 - unit 11.
* Help Ps to review : pronunciation, grammar, and vocabulary

* By the end of the test , Ps will be able to consolidate their knowledge.
II. Teaching aids : Paper tests

III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 1') Checking Ps’attendance

Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees

10B
10C
10E
10K

I. Rewrite the following sentences.

1/ Visitors can study butterflies in Cuc Phuong national park.

Butterflies...
2/ He is ill, so he stays at home

If...
3/ Lan hasn't any money, so she can't buy a new book.

If...
4/ Mai is cleaning the floor now.

The floor...
5/ I wasn't thirsty, so I didn't drink water.

If...
6/ Lan cooked dinner yesterday evening.

Dinner...
II. Choose the underlined word that must correct

7/ The bicycle is be repaired by my brother
a b c d

8/ It was interesting go there by coach last weekend
a b c d

III. Read carefully and fill in the blanks with the most suitable words.

A. These days it is impossible..9...a newspaper without...10...about the damage that
we are doing to the environment. The earth ...11....and the future looks...12...What should
we....13....for our environment?

B. We can't....14...up our polluted rivers and seas overnight. We can’t stop the
disapearance ...15.... plants and animals. But we can stop...16...the problem while
scientists search....17...anwsers and laws...18...in nature's defence.

9/ a open b opened c opening d to open

10/ ato read b read c reading d reads

11/ a be threatened b is threatened c is being threatened d being threatened

12/ agood b bad c well d badly

13/ ado b work c to do

d to work

14/ a cleaned b cleaning c clean d to clean

15/ a in b about c with d of

16/ a worsen b worsening c to worsen d worsened

</div>
(140)<div class='page_container' data-page=140>

17/ a of b for c at d on

18/ a is passed b are passed c passed d pass

IV. Choose a,b,c or d to complete sentences

19/ Have you ever...Cuc Phuong national park?

a visited b to visit c visit d visiting

20/ I would have bought a new bicycle if I ...enough money.

a have had b had have c had d had had

21/ We were surprised...the news.

a on b at c of d in

22/ This river was...by chemicals

a contaminant b contaminate c contaminated d contamination
23/ If you watched TV a lot, your eyes...weak

a will be b would be c are d is

24/ Are you interested in...football?

a to play b play c playing d played

25/ We...English before we went to England.

a studies b studied c had studied d have studied

26/ If you...the prize, you would become a millionaire

a have won b won c win d would win

27/ Would you like ...to the zoo with us?

a came b coming c to come d come

28/ My sister went out without...the gate.

a locks b locking c to lock d lock

29/ Nguyen Hue's army...in Quen Voi.

a were stationed b was stayed c was stationed d were stayed
30/ Cuc Phuong national park ...160km South west of Hanoi

a located b be located c to locate d is located

31/ The building in the middle of the town...

a is painted b are painted c are being painted d is being painted
32/ The high ...level was found in food.

a poisoned b contaminatant c polluted d toxic

33/ The best time...the park is during the dry season.

a visit b visited c to visit d visiting

34/ Can English...all over the world?

a spoke b be spoken c speak d is spoken

35/ It is interesting...that they will join us

a to know b knowing c knows d know

36/ How about...a new watch?

a bought b buy c buying d to buy

37/ Many new roads...in this city.

a are being built b are building c is being built d build
38/ I will...the usual bus tomorrow.

a to catch b catch c caught d catching

V. Pick out the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the 
others.

39/ a seat b dead c bean d meat

40/ a lived b worked c hoped d studied

</div>
(141)<div class='page_container' data-page=141>

II. Keys

1. Butterflies can be studied in Cuc Phuong National Park by visitors
2. If he weren't ill, he wouldn't stay at home .

3. If Lan had some money , she would buy a new book.
4. The floor is being cleaned by Mai now.

5. If I had been thirty, I would have drunk water.
6. Dinner was cooked by Lan yesterday.

7.b 8.c 9.d 10.c 11.c 12.d 13.a 14.c

15.d 16.b 17.b 18.b 19.a 20.d 21.b 22.c

23.b 24.c 25.c 26.b 27.c 28.b 29.c 30.d

31.d 32.d 33.c 34.b 35.a 36.c 37.a 38.b

39.b 40.a

---

*---Sat, March 7, 2009

</div>
(142)<div class='page_container' data-page=142>

I. Aims and objectives :

*Check Ps' knowledge that they learnt from unit 8 - unit 11
* Help Ps to correct the test and give some main points .

* By the end of the test, Ps will be able to consolidate their knowledge.
II. Teaching aids : Paper tests

III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 1') Checking attendance

Class Teaching date Attendance Absentees

10B
10C
10E
10K

2. New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

Warm up

* Give some Qs to Ps

1. Is the test difficult or easy ?

2. What sentences do you feel most difficult?
3. What are you reinfored for your English ?

Answer the questions

Correct the test

* Ask Ps to scan the test quickly
* Call on each Ps do the test again
* Correct the test

* Give keys and explain if necessary.
I. Rewrite the followings

1. Butterflies can be studied in Cuc Phuong National
Park by visitors

2. If he weren't ill, he wouldn't stay at home .
3. If Lan had some money , she would buy a new
book.

4. The floor is being cleaned by Mai now.

5. If I had been thirty, I would have drunk water.
6. Dinner was cooked by Lan yesterday.

II. Correct mistakes.

7. The bicycle is be repaired by my brother

a b c d

8. It was interesting go there by coach last weekend
a b c d

III. Reading

9.d 10.c 11.c 12.d 13.a
14.c 15.d 16.b 17.b 18.b
IV. Complete sentences

19.a 20.d 21.b 22.c 23.b 24.c 25.c 26.b
27.c 28.b 29.c 30.d 27.c 31.d 32.d 33.c
34.b 35.a 36.c 37.a 38.b

V. Pronunciation

39/ a seat b dead c bean

dmeat

40/ a lived b worked c hoped

dstudied

* Redo exercises
* Check their answers
* Give teacher the ideas if
have.

* Write correction in the
book

5. Home work Preparing the next period ( unit 12 - reading )

</div>
(143)<div class='page_container' data-page=143>

Fri, March 13th, 2009

Period 72: Unit 12 - Music 
 Lesson 1: Reading

I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to read a passage about music .
- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to

+ use vocabulary items related to music.

+ Guess the meaning of words based on contexts
+ scan for specific information about music.
* Skill developed: reading skill.

II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts ,

</div>
(144)<div class='page_container' data-page=144>

III. Procedure : 1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance

Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees

10B
10C

10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : No
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up: (5)

Ask Ps to answer some Qs
* Who are they?

+ a person who sings ?

+ a person who writes music ?

+ a person who plays a musical instrument ? 
+ a style of music with strong and loud beats ? 
* Check and give correct answers.

+ singer ;+ composer;+ musician ;+ rock 
* Ask Ps to give some types of music

- classical music
- folk music
- rock’n’roll
- pop music
- jazz

- country music: nhạc đồng quê
- traditional music

- Answer Qs in pairs

- Some pairs present to the class.

- Check their answers

2. Before you read: 
* Play the tape.

* Ask Ps to read the text.

* Give some new words mention in the text.
Emotion (n)c¶m xóc

Anger (n) tức giận
Integral (a) gắn liền
Funeral (n) đám tang
Solemn (a) trang nghiêm

Mournful(a) : tang thơng, buồn rầu
Lull (v) ru ngủ

Delight the senses (v) kích thích giác quan 
Convey (v) biểu l, truyn t

stype: phong cách
beat: nhịp

be like: giống

set the tone for: tạo nên ko khí vui.
joiyfulness(n) sự vui nhộn

joiyful(adj)

fairy tale: chun cỉ tÝch

* Matching. 1.b 2.e 3.d 4.a 5.c

- Read aloud

- Do the task in pairs
- Give the answers
- Check their answers

- Listen to the teacher
- Read after teacher
- Read in chorus
- Make up sentences

- Give meaning of the words in
the box.

3. While you read: (20)
* Task 1 : gap filling

* Ask Ps to read the passage quickly again

* Ask Ps to fill in the blanks in the task 1
* Call on 2 Ps do in front of class

* Give correct answers.
1. communicate (v) 
2. lull (v)

3. delights (v)

4. Integral part ( np) 
6. emotion (a)

7. mournful (a)

- Read the passage quickly again
- Do the task1 individually
- Exchange their answers with
other students.

</div>
(145)<div class='page_container' data-page=145>

*. Task 2 : answering Qs

+ Ask Ps to study the five Qs in the book
before.

+ Ask Ps to underline some key words
+ Ask Ps to discuss their answers with their
peers.

+ Call on Ps to write their answers on the board
and ask them to explain their choices.

+ Give correct answers:

1/ Language and music ( line 2 )

2/ It can express ideas, thoughts and feelings 
( line 3-6)

3/ it adds joyfulness to the atmosphere of a 
festival and makes a funeral more solemn and 
mournful ( line 9-11)

4/ It makes people happy and excited. It 
delights the senses ( line 13)

It is a billion-dollar industry ( line 14)

- Study five Qs

- Underline some key words.
- Read the passage and answer
Qs individually.

- Compare the answers and
explain.

- Check their answers

- Some pairs present to the class.

4. After you read: (7)

* Ask Ps to answer the two Qs in the books
* Goes around to help the groups when
necessary.

* Give feedback

1- There are 5 roles of music that are 
mentioned in the text.

- Music can express ideas, thoughts and feeling
- sets the tone for important events and

occasions

- lulls babies to sleep

- wakes students up in the morning
- entertains

2- What do you think which of roles is the most 
important?

- I think the most important role is that it 
entertans people because when we go home 
after a day of studying hard, we feel tired so we
listen to music help us more relaxed, we feel 
less stressful and we can continue with other 
work.

( Music can set the tone for important events, 
occasions and festival. It makes them more 
exciting)

Do in groups

- Compare their answer with
other groups

- Report their ideas to the class.
- Listen to teacher to explain
- Write the correct sentences in
the notebook.

3. consolidation ( 2') summarize main points

4. Home work ( 2') * learn new words by heart and read the passage again
Fri, March 13th, 2009

Period 73 : Unit 12- Music
Lesson 2- Speaking
I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to speak about music .

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to + ask and answer Qs about music .
+ talk about favourite kinds of music.
- Skill developed: speaking skill.

II. Teaching aids :

- Textbook, handouts ,
III. Procedure :

</div>
(146)<div class='page_container' data-page=146>

Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees
10B

10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5')

- Write some new words on the board.
- Read the passage and answer some Qs .
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up : (3)

* Request Ps to give some kind of music
* Ask Ps to tell some names of famous
singers in the world and Vietnam.

- Give some kind/sort of music
- Name some of singers you’ve
known.

2. Task 1: answering Qs (10)
* Ask Ps to read aloud the passage.
* Elicits some words:

- Keep sb happy = make sbd happy = 
=Cheer sbd up : làm cho ai vui vẻ 
- Band (n) ban nh¹c

- piece of music

- Kind/sort of music: loại nhạc
- Be easy to listen to : dễ nghe 
- Walkman: máy nghe nhạc nhỏ
- have the radio on: bật đài

- Help sbd forget troubles and worries: gióp
ai quªn bn phiỊn and lo l¾ng

* Ask Ps to answer the 4 Qs in the book.
* Go around to observe Ps working.
* Give suggestion

1. She likes pop music.

2. Because it keeps her happy.
3. the Backstreet Boys

4. She listen to music all the time.

3. Task 2: ask and answer about music.

(10)

* Ask Ps to study the first column of the
table

* Ask Ps to look at the example in the book
and make exchanges.

* Give some suggested Qs :

+ What kind/sort of music do you like? 
+ What is your favourite songs/ piece of 
music/music programme ?

+ Can you tell me what your favourite kind 
of music ?

+ Why do you like it ? 
+ What makes you like it?
+Why are you interested in it?
+ Can you give some reasons?

+ Who is your favourite singer/ musician 
/band?

+ When/what time do you often listen to

- Read the passage loudly
- Listen and write new words

- Do the task in pairs

- Compare their answers with
others.

- Some pairs present to then class.

- Study the table
- Look at the examples

- Make the exchanges by using
teacher's suggested answers.

</div>
(147)<div class='page_container' data-page=147>

music?

+ How often do you listen to music?
+ How long do you often listen to music 
each time?

* Listen and correct mistakes

4. Task 3 : Reporting on the information 
(7)

* Elicits the structures Ps can use
+ Both Lan and Huong like ...
+ Ba likes ..., and so does Lien .
+ Nga likes ...and Binh does , too.
+ Thuy likes ... but Minh prefers ...
 ( prefer smt to sth:thích cái gì hơn)

* Call on some Ps to report to the class.

- Do the task in groups

- Some Ps report to the class

4. Consolidation ( 2 ')

5. Homework: write about your favourite music . 
Learn some structures and new words.

Fri, March 13th, 2009

Period 74: Unit 12- Music 
 Lesson 3 -Listening

I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps to listen about favorite musician .

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to listen to get specific information.
* Skill developed: listening skill.

II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts , 
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance

Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees

2.Previous lesson check : (5')

</div>
(148)<div class='page_container' data-page=148>

3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up: Network (5)

* Say sth about Van Cao musician you know,
using the suggestions.

- born: 15-11-1923

- place of birth: Nam Dinh
- Family: poor workers

- start composing music: when very young.
- 1st song: 1939, quickly become famous.
- Tien quan ca ( National Anthem): 1944
- died: 10-7-1995.

a very talented musician and his songs
are popular with the VNamese people.

- Discuss with your parners about
Van Cao musician

- Say in front of the class

2. Before you listen: (8)

Talking about Van Cao

* Ask Ps to look at the picture of Van Cao and
tell the class any thing they know about Van
Cao.

* Ask Ps to do exercise
* Call on Ps to read out
* Check and give answers :

+ Van Cao ' songs : Suoi Mo , Tien Quan Ca ,. 
Truong Ca Song Lo , Lang Toi .

+ Tinh Ca was written by Hoang Viet .
+ Ha Noi mua thu was written by Vu Thanh 
* Ask Ps to repeat some new words and give
meaning of them .

- Rousing (a)khuấy động, sơi nổi
- Lyrical (a) trữ tình

- Rural (a)thc vỊ n«ng th«n(rural life)
- to be proud of: tự hào về

- author: tác giả

* Which of the adjectives provided can be used
to describe Van Cao's music.

- Look at the picture of Van Cao

and say some thing about Van Cao.
- Do the exercises individually.
- Read the answers out.

- Check their answers

- Repeat some new words and give
meaning of then words.

- All of them can be used to
discribe Van Cao’s music, except
for “boring”

3. While you listen: (7)
Task 1 : true / false

* Instructs Ps to use some strategies.

* Ask Ps to read the statements and underline
key words.

Examples: guest of the show, ...
* Play the tape for Ps to do the task

* Ask for Ps 's answer and write them on the
board.

* Play the tape for Ps to check their answers.
( pause if necessary )

* Ask Ps to compare their answers with other
groups.

* Give correct answers:

1. F ( the guest is Quang Hung )Lan huong is 
the MC

2. F ( He likes some Vietnamese musicians ) 
not only Van Cao

3. T ( Some are the music about rural life)“ ”
4. F ( It was written in 1944 ) not 1954

F ( He always feels proud of his country when 
he hears the song)

- Read the statements and underline
the words.

- Listen to the tape and do the task
individually.

- Answer and explain the answers
- Write on the board

- Check their answers

</div>
(149)<div class='page_container' data-page=149>

Task 2 : Answering Qs (9)

* Ask Ps to read the Qs and underline key
words.

* Play the tape and ask Ps to do the task
* Play the tape again for Ps to check their
answers .

* Give feedback:

1- It's My favorite Musician “ “
2- He likes the song Tien Quan Ca “ “

3-He likes it because it's hard and solemn: It 
makes him feel great and proud of his country.

- Read the Qs

- Listen and do then task
individually.

- Write down the answers
- Compare their answers with a
friend

- Give answers and explain.

4. After you listen (8)
* Give some Qs about QH ?

1. What does QH think about Van Cao ?

2. What does QH do when he listen to Tien 
Quan Ca ?

3. How are his songs about rural life in VN?
* After their answers T gives the hand out.

Quang Hung 's ideas Your ideas
Agree or 
disagree ? 
Van Cao s music is ’

very rousing.

Tien Quan Ca is hard 
and solemn

His songs about rural 
life in Vietnam are 
sweet, gentle and very 
lyrical.

* Look at the QH 's ideas and give your ideas .
you can agree or disagree, give your reasons.

- Answer the Qs and discuss in
groups.

- Look at the handout and discuss
why Ps disagree .

Eg: I agree with Quang Hung s ’
opinion. I think that Van Cao s ’
music is not only solemn and

rousing but also very lyrical. When 
our country was in war, a lot of 
people sang his songs such as “
truong ca song lo . It made them ”
feel stronger and more willing to 
fight against the enemies to protect 
our motherland. Whenever I hear 
the song Lang Toi , I feel so “ ”

peaceful. In front of my eyes are the
sights of famers working in their 
fields, the paddy (rice) fields 
stretch vastly. Van Cao s music is ’
highly appreciated by the Vnamese 
people.

- stretch(v) trải dài; vastly(adv) 
mênh mông.

- Proper ideas of Ps
4.Consolidation ( 1') summarize main points

5. Homework: ( 1') write some information about Nam Cao and his music.
Sun, March 22, 2009

Period 76 Unit 12 - Music

Lesson 4 -Writing 
I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps know how to write a paragragh about sbd .

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write about the life story of the famous
person.

* Skill developed: writing skill.

II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts , 
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance

Class Teaching date Atendances Absentees

10B
10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5')

</div>
(150)<div class='page_container' data-page=150>

- Do you agree or disagree with QH’s ideas about Van Cao’s music ?
- What do you know about Van Cao? let me see.

3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up:

* Play a piece of music of Scott Joplin and ask:
- Who composed this tune?

* Give a picture of Scott Joplin and ask:
- Do you know who is he?

- What do you know about him?/ can you tell
me any information about him?

* Introduce a profile of Scott Joplin.

- Listen to a piece of music and
answer the Qs.

- Discuss with your parners about
picture

and then answer the Qs.
- Say sth about Scott Joplin.

2. Writing:Writing a profile

* Task 1: Make up complete sentences about 
Scott, a famous American musician.

* Give some new words

- prompt sbd to do sth (v): xúi dục, thúc dục ai
làm gì

- prompt (n): lời nh¾c

- profile (n): bản tiểu sử sơ lợc
- black family: gia đình ngời da den
- as well as(adv) cũng nh

- tune (n): giai ®iƯu
- mixture (n) sù pha trén

- Ragtime (n): nhạc ragtime tiền thân của nhạc
jazz, phổ biến cộng đồng ngời Mỹ da đen –
châu phi

- Rag (n): nh¹c rag thc thĨ lo¹i ragtime
* Guide Ps to write as example.

* Go around to suggest if necessary.

* Ask each group to report or write on the
blackboard

* Check and correct mistakes.
Keys:

1- He learnt to play music when he was very 
young.

2- He learnt to play the works of composers 
like Bach, Beethoven, Mozart as well as to 
compose music

3- He quickly became famous

4- His tunes were wonderful mixture of 
classical European and African

5- All in all, he wrote 50 piano rags, and was 
called the King of Ragtime.

6- Scott Joplin died in 1917.

* Scan the task 1

- Read and write new words

* Discuss with partner

- Complete sentences, relying on
prompts below

- Some write down the blackboard,
some report in front of class.

* Combine sentences in A with the suitable 
information in B

* Request Ps to combine

A B

1. What is his name? a. songs, poems,
paintings

2. When was he

born? b. very poor

3. Where was he

born? c. 1923

4. How was his d. 1939

* Discuss in group.

- Report the result in front of class

</div>
(151)<div class='page_container' data-page=151>

family?

5. When did he

compose music? e. 1995
6. When did he

compose his first
song?

f. Nam Ha
7. When did he

compose VNamese
National enthem
“Tien Quan Ca”?

g. when he was very
young

8.What are artistic

works? h. 1944

9. When did he die ? i. Van Cao, a famous
Viet Namese

musician
* Go around to suggest

* Check and correct mistakes
Keys:

1. i; 2. c; 3. f; 4. b; 5. g; 6. d; 7. h; 8. a; 9.
e

* Task 2 : write about the life story of Van 
Cao

* Suggest Ps to write a paragragh about Van

Cao’s life story, using prompts below or
information in table above.

* Go around to guide

* Request Ps to read aloud the written
paragragh

* Check and correct mistakes
Suggestion:

Van Cao was born on November fithteen, 1923
in Nam Dinh, into a poor worker family. He 
started composing music when he was very 
young. His first song was written in 1939 and it
quickly became famous. The song Tien Quan “
Ca , which is the National enthem of VN, was ”
written in 1944. Van Cao was also good at 
other artistic works like song wrting, poem 
writing and paintings. He died on Junly tenth 
in 1995. Van Cao was/is known as a very 
talented musician and highly appreciated by 
Vnamese poeple.

* Work in groups
- Discuss with partners
- Write out the handouts
- Hang the handouts on the
blackboard

- Read aloud.

4.Consolidation ( 1') Retell the information about Van Cao.

5. Homework: ( 1') Write a short passage about 50 words about a VNamese 
musician you like best.

Sun, March 22, 2009

Period 77 Unit 12 - Music
 Lesson 5 – Language focus 
I. Aims and objectives :

</div>
(152)<div class='page_container' data-page=152>

- Help Ps distinguish the sounds /s/ and /z/

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to pronounce the sounds /s/ and /z/ correctly
* Skill developed: reading and doing exercise skills.

II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts , 
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance

Class Teaching date Atendances Absentees

10B
10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5')

Read a short passage about VNamese musician you like best. (Prepared at home)
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up:

* Choose the word whose underlined part is
pronounced different from the rests.

1- peas zoo relax prize
2- Susan spring sad solf
3- fiction listen wish mission
4- missing jazz kiss message
5- music finish option depression
* Go around in order to check

* Ask Ps to give result
* Check and correct
Keys

1. relax /s/ 2. Susan /z/ 3. listen /s/ 4.
jazz /z/ 5. music /z/

* Eg: To relax, Susan listens to jazz music
/s/ /s//z/ /s/ /z/ /z/ /z/

* Work in groups

- Discuss with your partners and
then report the result in front of
class.

- Correct mistakes and write down
the notebook

- Read the example.
2. Pronuciation:

* Ask Ps to read again and underline the words
pronunced /s/ ; /z/

* Go around to guide

* Ask Ps to write the sound /s/; /z/ on the
blackboard

* Check and correct

- Discuss and underline the words
has sound /s/; /z/

1- Susan loves classical music
/s/ /z/ /z/ /s/ /z/
2- I like to listen to jazz records
/s/ /z/
/z/

3- My aunt likes to watch the film “
The

/s/
sound of music
/s/ /z/

4-But my cousin prefers going
toconcerts

/z/ /z/
/s/

5- He’s won the first prize in
singing

/z/ /s/ /z/
/s/

fock songs
/z/

6- I’d like a piece of bread and
some peas

/s/
/s/ /z/

3. Grammar: To infinitive

</div>
(153)<div class='page_container' data-page=153>

* Look at these examples and say what you
understand “to feel relaxed”

- To feel relaxed, Susan listens to jazz music.
- Susan listens to jazz music to feel relaxed.
* Explain: To infinitive is used to show purpose
- Apart from “To infinitive”, we can also use “
in order to + V” or “ so as to + V” .

Eg: We are moving to a new flat in order to/so 
as to be near our office.

- Negative ( in order not to +V; so as not to
+V)

Eg: I always get up early in order not to/so as
not to be late.

- Sometimes we can also use “for + N” to show
purpose

Eg: What does Susan listen to jazz music for?
She listens to jazz music for relaxing/ to feel
relaxed

- Wh – question:

Wh + auxiliary verb + Subject + main verb?
Eg: What kind of music do you like?

Why dou you like to listen to music?
When do you often listen to music?
Who is your favourite singer?
Where did you buy a walkman?

* Discuss in groups.

- Report the result in front of class

- Give some examples

4. Exercise
Exercise 1:

Answer the Qs, using words in the brackets
1- I phoned her to tell her the good news
2- I’m saving money to huy a cassette player
3- She pracrises singing all day to win the
singing contest

4- I’m learning Frech to sing Frech songs
5- The monitor always goes to class on time to
set a good example for the class.

Exercise 2: Complete each sentence with the 
right form of a suitable verb.

1- to read/ to buy
2- to buy

3- to send/ to post
4- to invite

5- to learn/ to study

Exercise 3: Make Qs for the underlined 
words/phrases in the following sentences.
1- What will you do if it rains?

2- What sort of music does your father enjoy
listening to?

3-When did he leave for HCM City?
4- Who wants to talk to you?

5- How did you spend the evening last night?
6- Who is your favourite musician?

7- Why do you like pop music?

* Work individually
- Do exercises ,1,2,3.

4.Consolidation ( 1') “To infinitive” to show purpose
5. Homework: ( 1') Prepare unit 13: film and cinema.
Sun, March 22, 2009

Period 78 Unit 13 – film and cinema
 Lesson 1 – Reading

</div>
(154)<div class='page_container' data-page=154>

I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps read the text and guess the meaning of words in order to understand the content
of text

- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to understand a brief history of cinema
* Skill developed: reading skill.

II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts ,

III. Procedure : 1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance

Class Teaching date Atendances Absentees

2.Previous lesson check : (5')

Read a short passage about VNamese musician you like best. (Prepared at home)
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Ps' activities

1. Warm up.(5)

* Ask Ps to look at the picture to answer the Qs.
1. What do you see in the picture?

2. What do people come to the cinema for?
3. What kind of film do you like to see?

* Work individually

- Look at the picture to answer the
Qs

2. Before you read

* Ask Ps to answer the Qs

1. Can you name some of the films you have
seen?

2. Discuss and match each of the description to a
kind of film.( An adj can use one more)

Kinds of film Description
1- action film a- interesting

2- cartoon b. funny

3- detective film c. boring
4- horror film d. mournful
5- love story film e. terrifying/

frightening
6- romantic film f. violent
7- science fiction

film g. vivid

8- silent film h. romantic

9- thriller film i. love, feelings
10- war film

11- comedies film

3. Do you want to see the film at the cinema or
on TV? and why?

At the cinema On TV

big screen , loud

sound no need to go out

easy to see no fear of traffic
up-to-date film (not

wait for long before
showing on TV)

watch in any way you
like (lying in bed,
sitting on sofa)
high quality film cheap ( no tickets)
good occasion for

friend meeting do a lot of private words while watching
film

* Discuss with your partners then

answer the Qs

* Report or write down the
blackboard

* Discuss avantage and

disadvantage of watching film at
cinema and on TV.

3. While you read

</div>
(155)<div class='page_container' data-page=155>

* Give some new words.
- century(n) thÕ kû

- sequence(n) trình tự, chuỗi
- still picture(n) ảnh tĩnh
- motion (n) sự vận động

- movement(n) sự chuyển động
- decade(n) thập kỷ

- existence ( sù tån t¹i)
- actor >< actress

- cast(n) đội ngũ diễn viên
- character (n) nhân vật
- part(n) vai diễn

- form (thĨ lo¹i)

- music film(film ca nh¹c)
* Task 1

* Ask Ps to scan the reading in order to find the
words that can match with the definition on the
column below

* Go around to help

1- cinema 2- sequence 3- a decade 
4- rapidly 5- scence 6- character
* Task 2

* Request Ps scan the reading to take the main
ideas so as to answer the Qs.

* Ask Ps to do in pairs. one asks and other
answer.

* Go around to help if necessary.
* Check and correct mistakes

1- The history of cinema began in the early 19th

century

2- At that time scientists discovered that when a 
sequence of still pictures were set in motion, they
could give the feeling of movement.

3- No, they didn t’

4- Audiences were able to see long films in the 
early 1920s.

5- The sound was introduced at the end of the 
1920s

6- As the old silent films were being replaced by 
spoken ones, the musical cinema appeared
* Task 3

Request Ps choose the best tittle for the reading
passage

Key: A Brief History of Cinema

* Read aloud new words

* Read again and do the task1

* Work in pairs

Ask and answer the Qs

* Scan the reading again and decide
to choose a best tittle of passage

5. After you read

* Use the cues given, talk brief about the reading
passage.

History of cinema began in the early 19th

century. At that time, films were littile more than
moving photograghs and they were usually 
short, just about one minute long. However, in 
1905 , films were longer with the changes of 
scence and camera positions, as well as

character parts. In those days, films were about 
5 or 10 minutes in length. It was not until the 
early 1910s that the first long films were

produced. Nevertheless, the cinema only began 
to become an industry in 1915. Films became 
longer and better and special places were built

* Work individually

Rely on the reading and write brief
history of cinema

</div>
(156)<div class='page_container' data-page=156>

to show films only. At the end of the 1920s, 
sound was inroduced. This made the cinema 
change completely, from America to the rest of 
the world. At this time , a new form of cinema 
appeared, that was the musical one.

4.Consolidation ( 1')

5. Homework: ( 1') Write a brief history of cinema again.

</div>
(157)<div class='page_container' data-page=157>

Fri, March 27th, 2009

Period 80: Unit 13- Films and Cinema
 Lesson 3 – Listening

</div>
(158)<div class='page_container' data-page=158>

I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps practise listening skill and understand the content of listening
- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to say about one's plan

* Skill developed: Listening skill. 
II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts , 
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance

Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees

10B
10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5')

- What kind of film do you like to see?
- Why do you prefer it to other films?
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

1. Warm up

Answer the questions

1- What do you usaully do in free time?

Ok! today we are going to study Unit 13-FILM
AND CINEMA and listen to a conversation
between Lan and Huong, what their plan are.
After listening, we have to do the tasks in the
textbook.

* Some of things often to do in free
time:

- going shopping

- Watching TV/seeing film

- reading book/doing my homework
- cleaning the house

- cooking

- washing clothes
- going to school
- listening to music

2. Before you listen
* Make Qs for Ps

- How often do you do each of the followings?
Put a tick in the column

* Draw the table on the blackboard
* Guide Ps to tick in the right column

go to the

cinema often sometimes never
watch TV

listen to the

radio x

go dancing
chat on the

Net x

listen to music x
* Check and correct

* Listen and Repeat words appear in the tape.
( See in the textbook )

* Work individually

- Tick in each the followings you
often do

- Compare your answer with you
partners

- Report your choices

Eg: I often watch TV, sometimes 
listen to music and I never go 
dancing

3. While you listen

Task 1: Look at the picture and try to guess what

</div>
(159)<div class='page_container' data-page=159>

* Now we are listening to the tape for 3 times
- What are they planing to do together ?
- Are they going to see Titanic film together ?
Task 2: Listen again and write their plans for the 
next week on the calendar.

Lan's plans Huong's plans
Mon see a play

Tue

Wed work and go to the

singing club at night
Thu visit

parents

fri take chinese classes

Sat busy

Sun go on a picnic to Hoa

* Look at the calendar and say what Lan and
Huong are going to do next week.

Task 3: Look at the calendar again and tell on 
what day they can meet.

- They are planning to do together 
to see the Titanic film.

- Yes, they are.

* Say

- Huong has lots of work to do, she 
is going to the singing club at night 
on Wednsday.

* Talk

- They can meet on Tuesday 
because they are both free on 
Tuesday.

4. After you listen

Talk about Lan and Huong's plans for next week.
* Look at the calendar and say what Lan and
Huong are going to do next week.

* Suggestion:

This is what Lan And Huong plan to do the next 
week. On Monday, Lan is going to see a play. On 
Wednesday, Huong is quite busy with work and 
she is going to the singing club at night.

Lan is visiting her grandparents on Thursday. 
The next day, Huong has to take chinese classes. 
On Saturday is a busy day of Lan, and Huong is 
going on a picnic to Hoa Lu with her friends. 
Therefore, the only day they can meet each other 
is Tuesday.

* Talk

Eg: Huong has lots of work to do, 
she is going to the singing club at 
night

4/ Consolidation:

Structure: be going to do sth
To + infinitive show purpose
5/ Homework:

Write your plan on the whole week, and prepare

Fri, March 27, 2009

Period 81 : Unit 13- Films and Cinema 
 Lesson 4 – Writing

</div>
(160)<div class='page_container' data-page=160>

I. Aims and objectives :

- Help Ps practise Writing skill and read comprehension the content of text
- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to write a short passage about a film
II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts ,

III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance 
Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees
10B

10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5') 
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

1. Warm up

* Ask Ps to discuss and answer the Qs
- What do you know about Titanic?
* Suggestion:

* Leadin new lesson.

Titanic is a tragic love story film, it is about a 
sinking of a luxury liner on its first voyage 
accross the Atlantic Ocean. It is based on the 
true story of Titanic disaster that occurred in 
1912. It was hit a big iceberg and it was sunk 
rapidly. Main characters are Jack and Rose...

Work in groups

- Discuss the Qs with partners
- Some of Ps say sth about Titanic

2. Activity1:

* Ask Ps to read quickly the text to take main
content

* Explain new words

- tragic (adj) bi thảm - tragegy (n) bi kịch
- sink/sank/sunk (v) đắm sinking (n) vụ đắm
- luxury (n) sang trng

- voyage (n) chuyến đi du lịch trên biĨn
- set (v) dùng c¶nh

- be based on : dùa trên cơ sở/nền tảng
- occur (v) sẩy ra

- generous (adj) hào phóng
- kill ones self: tự tử

- hit (v) đâm vào

- iceberg (n) tảng băng

Work individually
- Read the text quickly
- Guess new words

3. Activity 2:

* Request Ps answer the following Qs below.
* Go around to guide

* Ask some Ps to answer
* Check and correct
Suggestion:

1- The tittle of the film is Titanic
2- It is a tragic love story film

3- It is about a sinking of a luxury liner on its 
first voyage accross the Atlantic Ocean/ It is 
about 2 lovers who first met each other while 
they were on board.

4- It is set in America.

5- It is based on the true story of Titanic disaster 
that occurred in 1912.

6- Two main characters are Jack and Rose.
7- Rose is a girl comming from rich and high

Work in paris

- Ask and answer the Qs below

</div>
(161)<div class='page_container' data-page=161>

class family, Jack is a young and generous 
adventurer, he saves Rose s life when she wants ’
to kill herself and then they fall in love each

other.

8- The film has a sad ending because one two of 
lovers was killed by the chill in Atlantic Ocean. 
Nevertheless, more than thousand people died 
when the liner was sunk.

4. Activity 3: Writing about a film

* Using description of Titanic as suggestion to
write a film you have seen.

* Guide

* Go around to check
* Correct mistakes

- Consultation (tham kh¶o).

I have nerver seen a more frightened film than 
the film Underworld 2 , which was on TV last “ ”
night. It is a horror fiction film. It is about the 
war between human beings and evils. The film 
was set in America. It was based on the fictional 
science that apart from human beings, there is 
another world of the evils, consist of vampires. 
The vampires want to kill all human beings but 
they were fought against by 2 brave soldiers who 
have undergone genetic changes and become 
stronger than they used to be. Finaly, the

vampires lose and the world of human beings is 
saved. The film has a happy ending.

Work individually

- Write and then report in front of
class

- Other Ps remark

evils: ma quỷ

vampire: ma cà rồng
genetic: gen

undergo: trải qua

( undergo genetic change: phải trải
qua sự thay đổi gen)

4/ Consolidation:
5/ Homework:

Write again a completely passage about Titanic.

Tues, March 31 , 2009

Period 82: Unit 13- Film and Cinema

Lesson 5: Language Focus 
I. Aims and objectives :

- Ps practise reading the sound /f/;/v/ and review use of adjectives of attitude

- Ps practise the structure: It was not until...that...and use of difinite articles a;an;the
II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts ,

</div>
(162)<div class='page_container' data-page=162>

III. Procedure : 1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance

Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees

10B
10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5') 
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

I. Warm up

* Read aloud these words

fan van few

view friendly lovely

* What is the difference between these words?
* Leadin new lesson.

To understand more about use of adj of attitude 
and It was/ is not until....that..., let's move to 
Language focus.

* Read aloud.
* Work in groups

- Discuss with your partners about
the difference of those words.

II. Pronunciation

* Request Ps to read and arrange them in the right
column

village feel profile drive wife 
arrive

/f/ /v/

* Request Ps listen to the tape and read aloud the
sounds /f/ and /v/ in the textbook.

- Read aloud the sounds /f/;/v/
- Arrange them in the right
column

+ Practise these sentences

III. Grammar

1- Adjectives ending ED or ING form
+ Ask Ps to correct error in each sentence
- This film is interested

- Are you interesting in watching film?

+ When do you use an adjectices ending with ED
or ING form ?

2- It was not until...that...

+ Ask Ps to correct error in each sentence
- I learnt English before until 2005

- It was not until I learnt English that 2005
3- The definite articles: a, an, the.

+ Ask Ps to correct error.

- Last night, I watched a interesting film on TV. It
is an horror film. It is about the war between the
human beings and the evils. A film was made in
America.

+ Explain use of a, an and the

Eg: I watched a film last night, the film is made in 
America

- 'a', 'an' and 'the' are the definite articles.

- 'a' precedes the countable - single nouns starting a
consonant

- an precedes the countable - prural nouns starting
with a vowel

- "The" precedes both countable or uncountable
nouns and comon nouns. It precedes a definite
noun which is mentioned above.

- Correct error
- Answer the Qs

- Adjective ending with ED used
for people anf adjectives ending
with ING used for things.

- Correct error
- Answer the Qs

- Correct error

- Give examples

</div>
(163)<div class='page_container' data-page=163>

below.

* Ask Ps to do the exercise.
* Check and suggest

* Request some Ps to come to blackboard to do.
1.

fascinating 4. irritating 7.surprising 10. frustrating
2. exciting 5.

horrifying 8. amusing
3.

terrifying

6. boring 9.

embarassing

Exercise 2: Use the adj ending ing or ed form to 
complete each sentence.

* Ask Ps to do the exercise.
* Check and suggest

* Request some Ps to come to blackboard to do.
1- a. depressing b. depressed

2- a. interested b. intresting
3- a. boring b. bored

4- a. excited b. exciting
5- a. exhausting b. exhausted

Exercise 3: Rewrite the following sentences.
* Ask Ps to do the exercise.

* Check and suggest

* Request some Ps to come to blackboard to do.
1. It was not until 1990 that she became a teacher
2. It was not until he was 30 that he knew how to 
swim

3. It was not until 1980 that they began to learn E.
4. It was not until boy's father came that he did his 
homework.

5. It was not until the light were on that the football
match started.

Exercise 4: Put a, an or the in the numbered 
blanks

* Ask Ps to do the exercise.
* Check and suggest

* Request some Ps to come to blackboard to do.
0. a 1. a 2. the 3. the 4. an 5. a 
6. a

7. the 8. the 9. the 10. the 11. the 12. the
13. the 14. an 15. a 16. a 17. the 18. a

- Do exercise 1 on the blackboard

- Do exercise 2 on the blackboard

- Do exercise 3 on the blackboard

- Do exercise 4 on the blackboard

4/ Consolidation:

Notice: - usage of adjectives ending with ED or ING
- It was not until...that...

Expression: - be interested in

- bored with + N/ Ving
- excited about

- be disappointed with

5/ Homework: Prepare the new lesson ' Unit 14 - Reading'.

Tues, March 31 , 2009

Period 83: Unit 14- The World Cup 
 Lesson 1 – Reading

</div>
(164)<div class='page_container' data-page=164>

I. Aims and objectives :

- Ps read a pasage about the history of world cup and understand the content of text
- By the end of the lesson, Ps will be able to summarize about the history of world cup
II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts ,

III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance

Class Teaching date Attendances Absentees

10B
10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5') 
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

1. Warm up

* Ask Ps to answer the Qs.

- What is the name of a famous world cup song ?
- What is about ?

- What do you know about world cup?

* Leadin: To understand more about World cup.
Let’s move to the new lesson, Unit 14: the World
cup.

Work in groups

- Discuss the Qs with partners
- answer the teacher’s Qs.

2. Before you read:

* Choose the correct answer:

- Where was the 2002 world cup held?
a. Japan b. Argentina

c. Uruguay d. Janpan & South Korea
- Which team became champion then ?

a. Brazil b. Germany
c. Holand d. Argentina
- Which team was the runner-up?
a. Japan b. Italy
b. Germany d. Holand

Work individually
- Read the text quickly
- Guess new words

3. While you read

* Read the text and request Ps to repeat.
* Guessing words or provide new words.
- tournament: giải thi đấu

- final game/match: trận chung kết
- finalist: đội/ ngời vào chung kết

- FIFA(FÐdÐration Internationale de Football
Association)

liên đồn bóng đá quốc tế

- governing body: cơ quan quản lý
- host nation: đội chủ nhà

- host: lµm chđ nhµ

- gain a victory over: dành chiến thắng trớc..
- witness: chứng kiến

- elimination games: cỏc trận đấu vòng loại
- be jointly held: đồng tổ chức

- trophy = cup
- defeat: đánh bại
Task 1:

Match the words in A with B.

* Request Ps to scan the text for words appear in
the passage.

* Go around and guide
* Check and correct error.
Suggestion:

Work in paris

- Guessing new words
- Read aloud new words

- Practise exercise 1

- Write the result on the blackboard

</div>
(165)<div class='page_container' data-page=165>

1.b 2. c 3. a 4. e 5. d
Task 2:

Complete each sentence with a word or a number.
* Request Ps to scan the text for main ideas to put
them in the space

* Go around and guide
* Check and correct error.
Suggestion:

1. 13 2. 32 3. Argentina 4. one 5. 26
Task 3:

True or fale – correct the fale ones

* Request Ps to scan the text for main ideas
* Go around and guide

* Check and correct error.
Suggestion:

1. F ( ...in 1930)

2. F ( ...every 4 years)
3. T

4. T

5. F ( ...won the world cup 5 times)

- Practise exercise 2

- Write the result on the blackboard

- Practise exercise 3

- Write the result on the blackboard

4. After you read

Talk about the events mentioned in the passage.
* Request Ps to scan the text for main ideas

* Go around and guide

* Call on some Ps read aloud in front of the class
* Check and correct error.

Suggestion:

1- When was FIFA set up?

2- How many teams taking part in the first world 
cup are there?

3- When was the first world cup held?

4- How many world cup tournaments have been 
organized up to now?

5- How many finalists are there in the 2002 
world cup?

6- When was the world cup held jointly by Japan 
and South Korea?

Discuss with your partners
- Make Qs and answer with the
partners

1- 1904 is the year when FIFA was 
set up.

2- There are 13 teams taking part in
the first world cup

3 - The first world cup was held in 
1930.

4- There are 17 world cup 
tournaments that have been 
organized up to now.

5- 32 is the number of finalists in 
the 2002 world cup.

6- 2002 is the year when the world 
cup was jointly held by Japan and 
South Korea.

4/ Consolidation:

Sumarize the content of text, use ‘after you read’ as suggestion
5/ Homework:

Practise speaking about history of the world cup.
Prepare new lesson ‘ speaking’

Tue, March 31 , 2009

Period 84 : Unit 14 - The world cup 
 Lesson 2 – Speaking

I. Aims and objectives :

- Practise asking and aswering about the World cup.

</div>
(166)<div class='page_container' data-page=166>

II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts , 
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance 
Class Teaching

date Attendances Absentees
10B

10C
10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5') 
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

1. Warm up

* Give jumble words and request Ps to arrange them
into a complete word.

- WINERN/ CSORE/ NNERRU – UP/ OHST –
NAIOTN/ CHAIOPMN.

* Ask Ps to guess what topic.

- Can you guess what topic we will discuss today?
* Suggestion:

- Winner/ Score/ Runner – up/ Host – nation/ 
Champion.

- The topic we will discuss today is football/ World
cup.

* Leadin to new lesson:

- To understand more about World cup. let’s move to
Unit 14; Speaking.

Discuss with partners.

- Put the leters into a complete
word.

- Answer the Qs.

- Open the book to move new
lesson.

2. Activity 1:

* Ask Ps to look at the picture and say some
information about football teams.

* Check and correct.
- Suggestion:

These are the teams took part in the 2002 World cup.
1- English football team.

2- french football team.
3- Italian football team.
4- Germany football team.

- Loook at the picture

- Discuss with partner about
football teams

3. Activity 2:

* Ask Ps to look at the table and say about World cup.
year winner score runner up score host

country

1930 Uruguay 4 Argentina 2 Uruguay

Eg: The first World cup was held in 1930. Uruguay
was hosted. the final match was between Uruguay and
Argentina. Uruguay defeated Argentina by 4 to 2. 
Uruguay became champion and Argentina became 
runner up.

* Guide Ps to say – Check – correct mistakes
* Read words: 0-0 ( nil - nil); 1-0 ( one – nil); 2-2 
( two all); in a penalty kick shoot out (trong cuộc đấu 
penalty)

Work in groups

- Discuss with partners

- Practise speaking, relying on
the information in the table on
the page 146.

4. Activity 3:

* Request Ps to use information above and ask the Qs.
Eg:

1- Where was the first world cup held?/ Where was 
the 1930 world cup held?

2- Which teams played in the final match?

Work in pairs

- Ask and answer the Qs
Eg:

A- Where was the first world

cup held?/ Where was the 1930
world cup held?

</div>
(167)<div class='page_container' data-page=167>

3- Which team became champion/ runner up?
4- What was the score of match?

* Suggest Ps to practise.
* Go around and check
* Correct mistakes.

B- It was held in Uruguay
...

5. Activity 4:

* Requst Ps say again “activity2” part. using the
information in table.

* Guid Ps to say
* Correct mistakes

The first World cup was held in Uruguay in 1930. the 
final match was between Uruguay and Argentina. 
Uruguay defeated Argentina by 4 to 2. Uruguay 
became champion and Argentina became runner up.

Work individually

_ Say about the world cup,
using the information in the

table above

4/ Consolidation:
5/ Homework:

Write a passage about the world cup you like best
Prepare new lesson ‘ Listening’

Sat, April 5th , 2009

Period 85: Unit 14- The world Cup 
 Lesson 3 – Listening

I. Aims and objectives : 
- Practise listening .

- Listening to understand the content of Listening passage about a famous footballer – PelÐ
- After listening, Fill the information in the table below.

II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts , 
III. Procedure :

</div>
(168)<div class='page_container' data-page=168>

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance 
Class Teaching

date Attendances Absentees

10B
10C
10E

10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5') 
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

1. Warm up

* Ask Ps to look at the pictures and say name of
the most football players in the world.

1- Pele – Brazilian

2- Maradona – Argentina
3-Zidane – French

4- Barthez – French
5- Beckham – English

* To day we will listen to a passage about a
famous football player who took part 3 world cup
and scored 1,200 goals in his football’s life. He is
Pele.

Work in pairs
- Ask and answer

A- What is the name of the team in
the picture?

B- This is ...

2. Before listening:

* Ask Ps to read these words below.

* Request Ps to use these words to say about
Pele.

* Suggestion:

Pele was born in Brazil. He was good at kicking 
and controlling the ball. He was the most 
goal-scorer. He became the Brazilian nationl hero. He
retired in 1977 and became an ambassador for 
football sport.

Say about Pele, a greatest football
player in the world.

3. While listening:
Task 1:

Listen to the tape and complete the table below.
* Play the tape 3 times

* Request Ps to fill the information they heard in
the table

* Ask some Ps to read aloud infront of class.
* Correct mistakes.

Task 2:

Ask Ps to listen again and answer the Qs.
Play the tape

* Ask Ps to answer.

1- What was Pele famous for as a football 
player?

2- How many World cup did he participate in?
3- Where did he play football before he retired?
4- What did Pele do after his retirement?

Listen and complete the table below.

Year Events

1940 He was born in Brazil
1956 He joined a Brazilian

football club

1962 He led the team to its
first world cup

championship

1974 He had scored 1,200
th
goals

1977 He retired and became
an international

ambassador for the sport
- Before his retirement, he played
for a American football club for 2
years.

</div>
(169)<div class='page_container' data-page=169>

4. After listening:

Talk about the milestones in Pele’s life.

- Milestone (giai đoạn quan trong trong cuộc đời 
ai)

- participte (tham dù)
- Promote (thóc ®Èy)

* Give some main information as suggestion.
- born in Brazil, 1940.

- famous for kicking and controlling the ball.
- 1956: join a Brazilian football club.

- 1962: led his team to first world cup 
championship

- 1958,1962,1970: participated 3 world cup
- 1974: scored 1,200 goals, became nationl hero
- 1977: retired, became international

ambassador to the sport, working to promote 
peace, understanding through friendly sport 
activities.

Work in groups

- Discuss with partners

- Use the information above as
suggestion

- Talk about the milestones in Ple’s
life.

4/ Consolidation:
5/ Homework:

Write a passage about the world cup you like best
Prepare new lesson ‘Writing’

Sat, April 5th , 2009

Period 86: Unit 14- The world Cup 
 Lesson 4 – Writing

I. Aims and objectives :

- Practise writing about an announcement.
II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts ,

III. Procedure :

</div>
(170)<div class='page_container' data-page=170>

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance 
Class Teaching date Attendance

s Absentees

2.Previous lesson check : (5') 
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

1. Warm up:

* Give an announcement

* Request Ps to look and answer the Qs.
1- What is this?

2- Where do you often see the announcements?
3- What do you usually use the announcements

for?

4- Have you ever read or write the
announcements?

* Today we are going to learn how to write an 
english announcement.

2. Task 1:

Read an announcement and then answer the Qs.
* Give new words:

- committee (n) ñy ban
- announce (v) thông báo

- announcement (n) lời thông báo
- announcer(n) ngời thông báo
- postpone (v) hoÃn

- severe (adj) khắc nhiệt

* Ask Ps to read the announement.

* Ask Ps to work in pairs, ask and naswer
1- Who is the announcer?

2- What is the announcement about?
3- When will the match be played?
4- Where will the match be played?

* Go around and check – correct mistakes.

- Read an announcement and then
answer the Qs.

- Guess new words

* Work in pairs

- Ask and answer with partner
1- The national football 
championship organizing 
committee.

2- It is about the match between 
Nam Dinh and Binh Duong on 
Sunday, April 18 has been

postponed due to severe weather 
condition.

3- It ill be played at 3p.m on 
Sunday, April 25

4- It will be played at My Dinh 
nation stadium.

</div>
(171)<div class='page_container' data-page=171>

3. Task 2:

Choose one of the following topics to write the
announcement.

* Give new words:
- captain(n) đội trởng
- call for: kêu gọi

- volunteer(n) ngêi t×nh ngun
- state (v) nªu

- take place: diƠn ra
- contact(v) liªn hƯ

- HCM Communist Youth Union: ĐTNCS HCM
- play a friendly match with: chơi trËn giao h÷u 
víi...

* Provide 2 groups.

Group1: choose the topic A.
Group2: choose the topic B.

* Request group to read topics carefully and
answer Qs.

* Topic A:

1- Who is the announcer?

2- What is the announcement about?

3- When and where will the first meeting of the 
team take place?

4- How can they contact announcer if they want 
to nkow further information?

* Topic B

1- Who is announcer?

2- What is the announcement about?
3- Where and when will the ticket be sold?
4- Where and when will the match be played?
* Go around to check and correct mistakes.

* Ask some of Ps in group to stand in front of the
class and read the announcement.

* Guess new words

* Read and write new words

* Provide groups

- Read the announcement carefully
- Each group answer the Qs.

Topic A:

1- The school football team

2- It s about the team needs more ’
players for new football season.
3- The first meeting will be took 
place at 3 p.m on Sunday, April 2nd

at school football field.

4- They can contact the head of 
team Nguyen Van Huy or phone 
number 0210..

Topic B.

1- HCM Communist Youth Union
2- It s about the school footbal ’
team plays a friendly match with 
New stars football club

3- The ticket will be sold at HCM 
Communist Youth Union s office.’
4- The match will be played at 3 
p.m on Sunday, April 20th in the

school field.

* Start writing an announcement.
Suggestion topic A:

LCS high school football team wishes to

announce that the team is seeking new players 
for the new footabll season. volunteers must be 
good at football and are studying at LCS high 
school. the shortlists of the team members will be
made pulic after a couple of tests. The first 
meeting will be at 3 p.m on Sunday, April 2nd at

school field. If you want to know further

information you can contact Nguyen Van Huy or 
phone number 0210825235.

Suggestion topic B:
LCS high school s HCM ’

Communist Youth Union wishes to 
announce that the school team will 
play a friendly match with New 
Stars Football Club at 3 p.m on 
Sunday, April 20th in the school

field. The tiket will be sold from 13 
to 14.30 at LCS high school s HCM’
Communist Youth Union s office ’
and cost 5.000VND each. All

money collected from match will be 
sent to the Organge Agent Victims

Fund of Lam Thao District.

4/ Consolidation:
5/ Homework:

Write a passage about the world cup you like best
Prepare new lesson ‘Writing’

</div>
(172)<div class='page_container' data-page=172>

Sun, April 6th , 2009

Period 87: Unit 14- The world Cup 
 Lesson 5 – Language focus

I. Aims and objectives :

- Practise the sounds /g/;/k/

- Practise using “will vs be going to”;
“will making prediction”
“will making offers”
II. Teaching aids : - Textbook, handouts , 
III. Procedure :

1.Class organization :( 2') Checking Ps' attendance 
Class Teaching date Attendance

s Absentees

10B
10C

10E
10K

2.Previous lesson check : (5') 
3.New lesson:

Teacher's activities Pupils' activities

1. Warm up:

* Ask Ps to read aloud the words:
because big
cup get
book goal
ticket Uruguay
* What is the difference between these words?
- meaning

- pronunciation
* Leadin:

To understand more the two sounds /k/ and /g/.
Let’s move to the language focus.

* Read aloud

* Say about the difference between
words above.

2. Pronunciation:

* Play the tape

* Ask Ps to listen and repeat

* Ask Ps to underline the letters which have
pronunciation by /k/ and /g/.

* Check and correct mistakes.

* Listen and repeat

* Underline the letters which have
pronunciation by /g/;/k/

</div>
(173)<div class='page_container' data-page=173>

3. Grammar:

Will vs be going to.
Will making prediction.
Will making offers.

* Request Ps to explain the following situations.
- I m going to come her house tomorrow’

1- How can you get to her house?
- I will borrow my father s motorbike’ .

2- Lan has been studying very hard for her exam.
- I m sure she will pass the exam easily.’

3- It’s so hot in this room.

- Shall I open the door?/ I will open the door.
* Explanation.

+ Be going to + V: expresses a plan, an intention.
- I m going to come her house tomorrow’

+ Will + V: expresses an intention at the point of
speaking (I will borrow my father s motorbike’ )
and Will also use to express the prediction(I m ’
sure she will pass the exam easily), the offers(
Shall I open the door?/ I will open the door).
* Ask Ps to give more examples.

Work in groups

- Discuss with partners
- Give the explanation.

- Listen and write

- Give more examples
3. Exercise:

Exercise 1:

Complete the sentences using will or be going to.
* Guide doing exercise.

* Give the example.

A- Why are you turning on the television?
B- I’m going to watch the news. (I/watch).

A- Oh, I’ve just realised I haven’t got any money.
B- Haven’t you? Well, don’t worry, I’ll lend you
some. (I/lend).

* Go around and check.
* Call Ps come to blackboard
Exercise 2:

Complete the sentences using will or won’t and
any other words that are needed.

* Guide doing exercise.
* Give the example.

A- Mary has been studying very hard for her
exams.

B- I’m sure she will pass the exams easily.
* Go around and check.

* Call Ps come to blackboard
Exercise 3:

Make offers with I ll’ for the following situations.
* Guide doing exercise.

* Give the example.

A- It’s so hot in this room.
B- I ll’ open the window.
* Go around and check.
* Call Ps come to blackboard

Work in pairs

- Study the examples carefully
- Do exercises 1

1- I ll get’

2- I m going to watch’
3- are you going to paint
4- I m going to buy’
5- I ll show you’
6- I ll have’
7- I ll do’
Work in pairs

- Study the examples carefully
- Do exercises 2

1- he ll help’

2- won t lend me nay money’
3- It ll rain today’

4- will have to wear glasses
5- will have a headache
6- won t like it’

7- I won t pass it’
Work in pairs

- Study the examples carefully
- Do exercises 3

1- I ll make you a cup of tea’
2- I ll open it’

3- I ll lend you some’
4- I ll give you’

5- I ll carry them for you’

4/ Consolidation:

Using of will and be going to

</div>
(174)<div class='page_container' data-page=174>

5/ Homework:

Do exercises in the workbook.

</div>

giao an 10 chuan

10 / 9 /2010

<b> : Test correction </b>

<b> Unit 4: Special education </b>

<b>: Speaking </b>

<b>Unit 4: Special education</b>

<b> </b>

<b>listening</b>

<b>Unit 4: Special education </b>

Period 23

<b>Writing </b>

<b>Unit 4: Special education</b>

<b>Language focus</b>

<b>Unit 5: Technology and you </b>

<b> Unit 5: </b>

<b>Technology and you</b>

<b> </b>

<b>Speaking </b>

<b>Unit 5: Technology and you </b>

<b>listening </b>

<b>Unit 5: Technology and you </b>

<b>Writing </b>

<b>Unit 5: Technology and you</b>

<b>Language focus</b>

<b>Unit 6 : an excursion</b>

<i><b>Period 30: Reading</b></i>

<b>Unit 6 : An Excursion</b>

<b>Unit 6 : An Excursion</b>

<i><b>Period 32: </b></i>

<b> listening</b>

<b>Unit 6 : An Excursion</b>

<i><b>Period 33: Writing</b></i>

<i><b>language focus</b></i>

<b>Period 36 : Written Test 2</b>

<b>Unit 8 - </b>

<b>the story of my village</b>

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về